STN Express with Discover! 6.0 User Guide - STN International
STN Express with Discover! 6.0 User Guide - STN International
STN Express with Discover! 6.0 User Guide - STN International
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
<strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! <strong>6.0</strong><br />
<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />
for Windows<br />
Version <strong>6.0</strong><br />
April, 2001<br />
Copyright Ó 2001 American Chemical Society<br />
All rights reserved.
1<br />
Introduction<br />
Introduction 1–1<br />
Overview of<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
<strong>6.0</strong><br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! is a fully integrated software package<br />
designed to easily and efficiently search scientific and technical<br />
databases online through <strong>STN</strong> as well as other online hosts. It includes:<br />
• a “wizard” interface for logon setup, selecting databases, conducting<br />
searches, displaying or analyzing results, creating and editing alerts,<br />
and much more, <strong>with</strong>out having to know the <strong>STN</strong> command language<br />
• easy retrieval of data for hyperlinked CAS Registry Numbers®,<br />
patent numbers, and other information<br />
• post-processing options for creating reports and tables from<br />
transcripts<br />
• easy access to Web services through your Web browser<br />
• easy structure-drawing and searching on <strong>STN</strong><br />
• fragmentation code generation from query structures for searching in<br />
World Patent Index<br />
• convenient access to the <strong>STN</strong> command-line interface.<br />
System<br />
Requirements<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>6.0</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! requires:<br />
Computer:<br />
an Intel 486 processor or compatible; a Pentium<br />
is recommended<br />
Connection to <strong>STN</strong>: a local modem, networked modem, or a TCP/IP<br />
(Internet) connection that supports the telnet<br />
protocol<br />
Operating System: Microsoft Windows 95, 98, Me, NT 3.51, NT 4.0<br />
or 2000<br />
Memory:<br />
32 MB of RAM; 64MB is recommended<br />
Hard Drive:<br />
16 MB or more of free hard disk space<br />
Monitor:<br />
VGA color monitor compatible <strong>with</strong> Windows,<br />
800X600 minimum screen resolution<br />
Mouse:<br />
a mouse, trackball, or similar pointing device<br />
Printer:<br />
high-quality graphics printer, e.g., laser or inkjet<br />
Internet:<br />
a web browser and Internet connection for those<br />
features that provide links to the World Wide<br />
Web
1–2 Introduction<br />
Help<br />
You have the following options for <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> help:<br />
• select an option from the Help menu on the Main Menu bar<br />
• press F1 or click the Help buttons for context-sensitive help.<br />
Technical Support<br />
For technical assistance, please consult Appendix I, Troubleshooting, in<br />
your <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> or visit http://www.cas.org/Support/software.html on the<br />
World Wide Web. If you continue to experience problems, contact your<br />
Help Desk by email or telephone. To send email, you may go to the <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> Help menu, select Request Help…, and then choose your <strong>STN</strong><br />
Service Center to open your email application.<br />
North America<br />
(and areas not in Japan or Europe)<br />
CAS<br />
2540 Olentangy River Road<br />
P.O. Box 3012<br />
Columbus, OH 43210-0012 USA<br />
Phone: 800-848-6533 (North America)<br />
614-447-3698 (worldwide)<br />
Fax: 614-447-3798<br />
Email: help@cas.org<br />
WWW: http://www.cas.org<br />
Japan<br />
Japan Science and Technology Corporation (JST)<br />
5-3 Yonbancho Chiyoda-ku<br />
Tokyo 102-0081 Japan<br />
Phone: (03) 5214-8414<br />
Telefax: (03) 5214-8410<br />
E-mail: overseas@mr.jst.go.jp<br />
WWW: http://www.jst.go.jp<br />
Japan Association for <strong>International</strong> Chemical Information (JAICI)<br />
Nakai Building<br />
6-25-4 Honkomagome, Bunkyo-ku<br />
Tokyo 113, Japan<br />
Phone: (03) 5978-3601<br />
Fax: (03) 5978-3600<br />
Email: helpdesk@jaici.or.jp<br />
WWW: http://www.jaici.or.jp/
Introduction 1–3<br />
Europe<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>International</strong><br />
c/o FIZ Karlsruhe<br />
P.O. Box 2465<br />
D-76012 Karlsruhe Germany<br />
Phone: +49-7247/808-555<br />
Fax: +49-7247/808-259<br />
Email: hlpdeskk@fiz-karlsruhe.de<br />
WWW: http://www.fiz-karlsruhe.de/<br />
About this <strong>User</strong><br />
<strong>Guide</strong><br />
The user guide covers both the basic and the advanced features of <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! <strong>6.0</strong>.<br />
You should be familiar <strong>with</strong> your Windows operating system. If you are<br />
not, you may refer to your owner’s guide for detailed information on your<br />
system.<br />
Items that you select, e.g., <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> buttons or menu options, are<br />
presented in bold type.<br />
Information intended for you to type or titles of publications or chapters<br />
are presented in italics.
2<br />
Installation and Main Menu 2–1<br />
Installation and Main Menu<br />
Installation<br />
This chapter covers the following topics<br />
• Installing from CD-ROM<br />
• Upgrading to <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>6.0</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
• Installing Adobe Acrobat Reader<br />
• Installing QuickTime<br />
• Opening <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
• Main Menu and Toolbar<br />
For information on Network Installation, refer to Appendix G. Network<br />
Installation, of your electronic <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> or<br />
the ReadMe.txt file.<br />
Installing from<br />
CD-ROM<br />
1. Insert the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! CD-ROM into the CD-ROM<br />
drive to start the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> setup program.<br />
If the setup program does not automatically start, double-click the<br />
CD-ROM icon to open it and then double-click setup.exe.<br />
2. Install <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! dialog box is displayed.
2–2 Installation and Main Menu<br />
Select any or all of the following in the Setup Options:<br />
• Copy Software to HD - to install the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
software<br />
• Softcopy documentation - to install the electronic <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />
• Start Menu Item - to create a Windows Start Menu item for <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong><br />
Select the appropriate Setup Type:<br />
• Single <strong>User</strong> - to install <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! to your local hard<br />
drive<br />
• Network <strong>User</strong> - see your Network Administrator for details<br />
• Network Server - for information, refer to Appendix G, Network<br />
Installation in the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> or click the View ReadMe<br />
button to view the ReadMe.txt file.<br />
Click Install <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!. Respond to the prompts to<br />
complete installation.<br />
Upgrading to<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>6.0</strong><br />
1. Insert the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! CD-ROM into the CD-ROM<br />
drive to start the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> setup program.<br />
2. Choose your setup options and select Single <strong>User</strong> from the Setup<br />
Type.<br />
3. Click Install <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>.<br />
Because you have an existing copy of <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>, its current<br />
location is placed in the dialog box as the default. Click Yes to<br />
overwrite your existing copy of <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>.<br />
Note that only files provided by your previous <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
installation programs are overwritten. Any structures, scripts,<br />
transcripts, and logon setups that you have created are retained.<br />
4. Respond to the prompts to complete installation.<br />
Installing Adobe ®<br />
Acrobat ® Reader<br />
The <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> is a PDF file. You will need<br />
Adobe Acrobat Reader to view the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>. To install the Acrobat<br />
Reader 4 from the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! CD-ROM, follow these<br />
steps:<br />
1. Insert the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! CD-ROM into the CD-ROM<br />
drive.<br />
2. Click the Install Adobe Acrobat Reader button.<br />
3. Respond to the prompts to complete the installation.
Installation and Main Menu 2–3<br />
Installing<br />
QuickTime<br />
QuickTime 4 software is needed to display JPEG (.jpg) and GIF (.gif)<br />
images that can be downloaded in some <strong>STN</strong> files.<br />
1. Insert the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! CD-ROM into the CD-ROM<br />
drive.<br />
2. Click the Install QuickTime button.<br />
3. Respond to the prompts to complete the installation.<br />
Opening <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
To open <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
1. Launch <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! from the Windows Start menu.<br />
By default, an entry has been made under Programs.<br />
2. When <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! is open, the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Main<br />
Menu & Toolbar are displayed.<br />
Main Menu<br />
The Main Menu contains the following menus:<br />
• File<br />
• Logon<br />
• Query<br />
• Results<br />
• Setup<br />
• Web<br />
• Help<br />
File menu<br />
File menu item<br />
Edit Text File<br />
Exit <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
Function<br />
Edit a text file, such as a script<br />
Close the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> application<br />
and all associated applications
2–4 Installation and Main Menu<br />
Logon menu<br />
The Logon! allows you to connect to an online service via a logon setup.<br />
There are no sub-menus to Logon!.<br />
Query menu<br />
The Query menu provides commands to build, edit, or use chemical<br />
structure queries, command files, predefined search strategies, and WPI<br />
fragmentation code strategies. For details, refer to Chapters 6-9.<br />
Query menu item<br />
Prepare Structure Query<br />
Prepare Command File<br />
Check Command File<br />
Edit WPI Strategy<br />
Generate WPI Strategy<br />
Print WPI Strategy<br />
Include WPI Other Code<br />
Concepts<br />
Function<br />
Open a new “Standard” structure<br />
drawing window.<br />
Open a file to create a script of<br />
commands for your online session.<br />
Refer to Appendix C for details.<br />
Check a script for errors.<br />
Edit an existing Derwent WPI<br />
fragmentation code strategy. Refer to<br />
Chapter 8 for information.<br />
Generate a WPI fragmentation code<br />
strategy for a WPI query structure.<br />
Refer to Chapter 8 for information.<br />
Print a WPI fragmentation code<br />
search strategy.<br />
Select Other Code Concepts to<br />
include when generating a WPI<br />
fragmentation code strategy. Refer to<br />
Chapter 8 for more information.
Installation and Main Menu 2–5<br />
Results menu<br />
Results Menu Item<br />
Browse Transcript<br />
Print Transcript<br />
Edit Transcript<br />
Export Transcript<br />
Accounting<br />
Table Tool<br />
Report Tool<br />
Predefined Report<br />
Open<br />
Function<br />
Open (display) a transcript in Browse<br />
mode.<br />
Print one or more transcripts.<br />
Edit the text portion of a .trn transcript.<br />
Export a transcript to a new RTF file.<br />
Create a cost report for <strong>STN</strong> online<br />
sessions. Refer to Chapter 12 for<br />
more information.<br />
Create a table from search results in<br />
transcript.<br />
Create a custom report from search<br />
results in transcripts.<br />
Create a predefined report from<br />
patent search results in transcripts.<br />
Open the Trnscrpt folder to browse<br />
transcripts, reports, and tables<br />
Setup menu<br />
Setup Menu Item<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Setup Wizard<br />
Connections<br />
Preferences<br />
Save Configuration<br />
Restore Saved Configuration<br />
Function<br />
Create an automated logon setup.<br />
Create or modify a logon setup<br />
configuration for an online host.<br />
Customize Preferences. Refer to<br />
Appendix A for information on General<br />
and <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results<br />
Preferences. Refer to Chapter 6 for<br />
information on Structure Drawing<br />
preferences.<br />
Save all logon setups.<br />
Restore all logon setups to the last<br />
saved configuration.
2–6 Installation and Main Menu<br />
Web menu<br />
Web Menu Item<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Columbus<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Karlsruhe<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Tokyo<br />
Function<br />
Link web browser to <strong>STN</strong> Columbus<br />
services.<br />
Link web browser to <strong>STN</strong> Karlsruhe<br />
services.<br />
Link web browser to <strong>STN</strong> Tokyo<br />
services.<br />
Help menu<br />
Help Menu Item<br />
Index<br />
Using Help<br />
View <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />
About <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
Function<br />
Obtain an index of help for <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong>.<br />
Find out how to use Windows help.<br />
Open the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> in<br />
your Adobe Acrobat Reader.<br />
View copyright and version<br />
information.
Installation and Main Menu 2–7<br />
Main Toolbar<br />
The Toolbar is used to quickly open the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> applications.<br />
Tool Button Name<br />
Setup<br />
Logon<br />
Prepare Query<br />
Browse Transcript<br />
Print Transcript<br />
Table Tool<br />
Custom Report Tool<br />
Predefined Report<br />
Edit Transcript<br />
Preferences<br />
Help<br />
Exit<br />
Function<br />
Create logon setups<br />
Log onto an online service<br />
Open a structure drawing window<br />
Open transcript and other files<br />
Print transcript and other files<br />
Create tables from transcript search<br />
results<br />
Create custom reports from<br />
transcripts<br />
Create a patent report from transcripts<br />
using a predefined template<br />
Open a transcript file for editing<br />
Set preferences<br />
Display a list of help topics.<br />
Quit the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> applications.
2–8 Installation and Main Menu<br />
Customizing<br />
the Toolbar<br />
To replace a button or gap on the Toolbar, follow these steps:<br />
1. Right click on a button or in an empty space on the toolbar.<br />
2. The <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Toolbar Preferences dialog box is displayed.<br />
Click Next.
Installation and Main Menu 2–9<br />
3. Click the Next button until the icon for the desired tool appears. Click<br />
OK to complete the action and select the button.<br />
4. The new button appears on the toolbar.
2–10 Installation and Main Menu<br />
To remove a tool button from the Toolbar, follow these steps:<br />
1. Right-click on the tool button that you want to remove.<br />
2. Click OK in the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Toolbar Preferences dialog box.
3<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup 3–1<br />
Your online connection and logon information are required each time you<br />
connect to <strong>STN</strong> or another online host. This information, e.g., the<br />
telephone number your modem will dial, or the Internet address of the<br />
host, is stored in a logon setup.<br />
For the latest logon setup information, visit<br />
http://www.cas.org/Support/software.html<br />
This chapter includes description and examples of the following topics on<br />
<strong>STN</strong> logon setups:<br />
• Internet setup <strong>with</strong> <strong>STN</strong> Setup Wizard<br />
• Manual modem setup<br />
• Customizing for academic accounts<br />
• Setup Definition Values<br />
• Managing setups<br />
Internet Setup<br />
<strong>with</strong> <strong>STN</strong><br />
Setup Wizard<br />
If you do not have any logon setups, the <strong>STN</strong> Setup wizard starts when<br />
you launch <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>.<br />
You may also access the wizard via the Setup menu.<br />
Click the Before I Begin button on the opening page for details of how to<br />
use the wizard.
3–2 <strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup<br />
Follow these steps:<br />
1. Select the <strong>STN</strong> Service Center for your account and confirm your<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Logon Port. For commercial accounts, X is usually correct. For<br />
other accounts, consult the materials supplied <strong>with</strong> your <strong>STN</strong> login ID.<br />
Click Next.<br />
2. Select the middle radio button to specify an Internet connection to<br />
<strong>STN</strong>.
<strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup 3–3<br />
3. Give your new logon setup a name by which you will remember it. If<br />
you choose, type your <strong>STN</strong> login ID and password to save them in the<br />
setup. Click Finish.<br />
Manual<br />
Modem Setup<br />
1. Click on the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Toolbar.<br />
2. The <strong>STN</strong> Setup dialog box is displayed. Click New to create a new<br />
setup.
3–4 <strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup<br />
3. The Setup Definition dialog box is displayed.<br />
Enter or select the following information:<br />
• type a name in Setup Name<br />
• select your <strong>STN</strong> Service Center, e.g., <strong>STN</strong>-Columbus, from the Host<br />
Name pull-down menu<br />
• type your Login ID and password (optional) if you do not want to be<br />
prompted for them at login<br />
• select your modem or appropriate communication option in Connect<br />
Via<br />
• for the Logon Method, select the appropriate telecommunications<br />
network or Directdial from the Standard list.<br />
Some telecommunications networks require additional information,<br />
i.e., Network <strong>User</strong> Address, Network <strong>User</strong> ID, Network <strong>User</strong><br />
Password. If required, a Network Logon section is added into this<br />
dialog box. Enter the appropriate information.<br />
• In the Primary Phone # box, type the telephone number appropriate<br />
for your Logon Method<br />
• select Standard as the Logoff Method<br />
Click OK.<br />
If you entered your password, you are prompted to re-enter it for<br />
verification. After you re-enter it, click OK.
<strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup 3–5<br />
4. Click Save to save this setup to your hard disk. Click OK to return to<br />
the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Main Menu & Toolbar.<br />
Customizing<br />
for Academic<br />
Accounts<br />
If you have an academic account, you need to change:<br />
• <strong>STN</strong> Port in logon setup<br />
• Account Preferences
3–6 <strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup<br />
Changing <strong>STN</strong><br />
Port <strong>with</strong> <strong>STN</strong><br />
Setup Wizard<br />
If you are using the <strong>STN</strong> Setup Wizard, replace the Logon Port of X <strong>with</strong><br />
the appropriate academic account port for your area. Contact your <strong>STN</strong><br />
account administrator or your <strong>STN</strong> Service Center for this information.
<strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup 3–7<br />
Changing <strong>STN</strong><br />
Port in a Manual<br />
Logon Setup<br />
1. Click on the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Toolbar. Highlight the setup you want<br />
to modify. Click Modify. The setup Definition dialog box is displayed.<br />
Click the Host Settings tab.<br />
2. Replace the <strong>STN</strong> Port of X <strong>with</strong> the appropriate academic port for<br />
your area.
3–8 <strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup<br />
Changing Account<br />
Preferences<br />
for academic<br />
accounts<br />
To customize Account Preferences for academic accounts, follow these<br />
steps:<br />
1. Click Setup from the Main Menu. Select Preferences and then<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Online and Results.<br />
2. Click on the Account tab of Preferences.<br />
In the <strong>STN</strong> Account Type box, select the type of account you have and<br />
its features:<br />
• Commercial (Full access) - default setting<br />
• Full Academic - if you have access to <strong>STN</strong> files under your academic<br />
program<br />
• FIZ Academic - if you have access to FIZ discounted files only<br />
• CAS & FIZ Academic - if you have access only to CAS and FIZ files<br />
under your academic program<br />
• BEILSTEIN subscriber - if you have a Beilstein subscription<br />
• GMELIN subscriber - if you have a GMELIN subscription<br />
• DERWENT subscriber - if you have a DERWENT subscription<br />
Under Property Data Databases, select the property databases that the<br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! wizards are authorized to access.<br />
Click OK.
<strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup 3–9<br />
Setup<br />
Definition<br />
Values<br />
The Setup Definition dialog box opens when you click New or Modify<br />
buttons in the <strong>STN</strong> Setup dialog. This dialog box contains the logon setup’s<br />
settings, including the name of the online host and the details about how to<br />
connect to the host.<br />
Setup name<br />
The Setup Name identifies a specific setup. The name must be 20<br />
characters or fewer and can include any combination of letters, numbers,<br />
special characters, and spaces.<br />
Suggested setup names would help identify the host, e.g., <strong>STN</strong>, and the<br />
connection method, e.g., Internet.<br />
Host name<br />
The Host Name identifies the online host that you want to access in this<br />
setup. Select the <strong>STN</strong> Service Centers for your account from the Host<br />
Name pop-up menu<br />
Login ID<br />
Type your <strong>STN</strong> login ID in the Login ID box. Entering a login ID at this<br />
time is optional. If you do not enter it here, you will be prompted to enter it<br />
when you log on to <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
Password<br />
Enter your <strong>STN</strong> password in the Password. For security, an asterisk is<br />
displayed for each password character you type. Your password is stored<br />
in the express.ini file in an encrypted form. Entering a password at this<br />
time is optional. If you do not enter it here, you will be prompted to enter it<br />
when you log on to <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
Path<br />
Select Path 1 to define the first communication path to <strong>STN</strong>. Select Paths<br />
2-4, as needed, to define alternate communication paths. When <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> tries to connect to <strong>STN</strong>, it first uses Path 1. If Path 1 fails to<br />
connect, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> tries the next path until the connection is made or<br />
there are no more paths to try.
3–10 <strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup<br />
Host Settings<br />
Select the Host Settings tab to see settings that are specific to <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
Many of the settings are critically important and cannot be changed.<br />
Click a √ in the Command Window box to cause <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! to open a Command Window when you log on to <strong>STN</strong>. The<br />
Command Window can be turned off and on while you are logged on.<br />
Click a √ in the Close Window at logoff box to tell <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! to close the session window after you log off. If you prefer to<br />
view cost information, scroll back through your session for any reason, or<br />
capture a transcript after you log off, do not select this option.<br />
Up to five commands may be entered in the Execute at first Host<br />
Prompt window. The first command is sent when the first => prompt is<br />
received, and the remaining commands are sent, one at a time, <strong>with</strong> each<br />
succeeding arrow prompt.<br />
By default, a carriage return is sent after each line. The keyword NOCR<br />
may be added as the last word on the last line that you enter to indicate<br />
that this line is to be displayed in the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window,<br />
but not sent. This allows you to enter data after the defined character<br />
string, before it is sent.
<strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup 3–11<br />
The <strong>STN</strong> Port is X by default and is a appropriate for commercial<br />
accounts. Change it to the port letter appropriate for you account if<br />
necessary.<br />
The Graphics option specifies whether chemical structure diagrams will<br />
be displayed in a transcript. Uncheck the Graphics box if you do not want<br />
to display structure graphics.<br />
Connect via<br />
Select a communication method from the Connect via pulldown menu to<br />
connect to the online host you selected.<br />
The method that you choose controls the information that is required in the<br />
Communication Settings section. This is described further in the<br />
Communications Settings section, later in this chapter.<br />
Connect via options are:<br />
• Winsock (Internet) - select if your network software supports<br />
Windows Sockets and Telnet from your PC (most do). When<br />
selected, the Host Name or IP Address, Port, and Echo fields are<br />
displayed. Enter the host name or host address, if different from<br />
the default (rare). Set Echo to No if you do not want <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
<strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! to echo characters as they are typed. The Port<br />
setting of 23 (Standard Telnet) in most cases should not be<br />
changed.<br />
• Dial-Up Networking - <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! lists all<br />
connections defined in Windows Dial-Up Networking. Dial-Up<br />
Networking connections are most commonly used to define<br />
connections to the Internet via an Internet Service Provider (ISP).<br />
When you log on to <strong>STN</strong>, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! will attempt<br />
to use the Standard Windows interface to Dial-Up Networking (in<br />
WININET.DLL). You will be prompted to connect to your ISP as<br />
needed. NOTE: Winsock is the underlying connection type for<br />
this option.<br />
• Modem - <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! lists all modems installed in<br />
the Windows Modems Control Panel. This option eliminates the<br />
need to set many of the modem options, because this information<br />
is obtained directly from Windows. Most users will only need to<br />
specify a phone number for this option. NOTE: If you cannot<br />
make a connection using this method, try using COM port option.<br />
• COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4 - select to connect via a serial<br />
port, e.g., to a modem, terminal server, or host system.
3–12 <strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup<br />
Standard logon<br />
Use a Standard Logon Method to connect to <strong>STN</strong> via one of the<br />
supported networks.<br />
To use a standard logon procedure, click the radio button next to<br />
Standard in the Logon Method section and select one of the supported<br />
networks from the pulldown menu. <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
automatically inserts the scripts to connect to <strong>STN</strong> through the selected<br />
network.<br />
For example, if a setup is defined to connect to <strong>STN</strong>-Karlsruhe via Datex-<br />
P, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! selects several scripts from the Scripts<br />
folder:<br />
• a script that sends dial commands to a modem<br />
• a script that connects to <strong>STN</strong>-K via the Datex-P network.<br />
• a script that logs on to <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
The scripts use the values in the logon setup, such as dial method, phone<br />
number, and NUA, to make the connection and log you in.<br />
Standard logoff<br />
Click the radio button next to Standard in the Setup Definition dialog box<br />
to tell <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! to use the discnct script to disconnect<br />
the communication path. This script handles most connections, including<br />
those made through a modem and via Winsock. If <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! does not correctly disconnect the communication path, you will<br />
need to define a custom logoff.<br />
Network Logon<br />
The Network Logon section in the Setup Definition dialog box is<br />
displayed when <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! recognizes that the Connect<br />
via option you selected requires information to make the network<br />
connection to <strong>STN</strong>. You may need to enter any of the following values:<br />
• NUA (Network <strong>User</strong> Address) - the address of the host on the<br />
network you selected. The value may be a character string, e.g.,<br />
stnc, or a numerical string, e.g., 03106001467<br />
• NUI (Network <strong>User</strong> Identifier) - a character string that identifies<br />
the user to the network. Some networks require this.<br />
• NUP (Network <strong>User</strong> Password) - a password to confirm the<br />
identity of the user on the network. Some networks require this.<br />
To keep the NUP entry secure, only asterisks are displayed when you<br />
type this value. It is stored in the express.ini file in encrypted form. To<br />
confirm your NUP, you are prompted to re-enter the password after you<br />
select OK in the Setup Definition dialog box.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! provides the NUA values for a limited number<br />
of networks. If an NUA is not available, an error message is displayed<br />
when you try to use the setup. If this occurs, return to the Setup<br />
Definition dialog box. Then select the path that failed and fill in the NUA<br />
and related fields.
<strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup 3–13<br />
Communications<br />
Settings<br />
The Communications Settings section of the Setup Definition dialog<br />
box contains the communication parameters used by <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! to connect to a host. The available settings are based on your<br />
selection in the Connect via pulldown menu.<br />
Settings for Winsock (Internet) and dial-up networking setups<br />
An example logon setup for <strong>STN</strong>-Karlsruhe using the Internet is shown:<br />
The Communications Settings for <strong>STN</strong> logon setups when Connect via is<br />
Winsock (Internet) or a Dial-Up Networking item are<br />
• Host Name or IP Address - the name or address of the <strong>STN</strong><br />
computer to which <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> will connect. For example, the<br />
name of the <strong>STN</strong>-Karlsruhe computer is stnk.fiz-karlsruhe.de and<br />
its address is 141.66.16.239. These values are provided<br />
automatically when you select an <strong>STN</strong> Service Center from the<br />
Host Name list.<br />
If you must connect to <strong>STN</strong> through a telnet gateway, enter the<br />
name or IP address of the gateway and see Appendix F for more<br />
information.<br />
• Port - the TCP/IP port number for telnet (Winsock) connections.<br />
The default is 23, and you should change this only if your<br />
organization has a firewall that uses a different port for the telnet<br />
protocol.
3–14 <strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup<br />
• Echo – the duplex setting that specifies whether to echo<br />
characters as they are typed. If you cannot see the characters<br />
you are typing or if you see two characters for every one that you<br />
type, try changing the Echo selection.<br />
Settings for modem setups<br />
When the name of a modem is selected in Connect via, the following<br />
settings are available in <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>. To view and change the modem’s<br />
other communications settings, use the Windows Modems Control Panel.<br />
• Echo – the duplex setting that specifies whether to echo<br />
characters as they are typed. If you cannot see the characters<br />
you are typing or if you see two characters for every one that you<br />
type, try changing the Echo selection.<br />
• Break Length - the duration of a Break signal sent by <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! through a serial (modem) connection. The<br />
duration ranges from 10 to 2000 milliseconds; the default is 500.<br />
If <strong>STN</strong> does not recognize the Break signal, you may need to<br />
increase this value. If the Break signal disconnects you from your<br />
network, you may need to decrease this value.<br />
• Dial - the type of dialing to be used: Tone, Pulse (rotary), or<br />
Manual. If Manual is specified, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
issues a message and waits for you to manually dial the<br />
telephone.<br />
• Primary Phone # - the telephone number for the network provider<br />
you selected.<br />
• Secondary Phone # - an alternate telephone number for your<br />
network provider that is used if the primary phone number fails to<br />
connect.
<strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup 3–15<br />
Settings for COM Port setups<br />
Here is an example logon setup for <strong>STN</strong>-Columbus using a COM port:<br />
When the COM port to which your modem is attached is selected in<br />
Connect via, the following settings are available in <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>.<br />
· Echo - the duplex setting that specifies whether to echo<br />
characters as they are typed. If you cannot see the characters<br />
you are typing or if you see two characters for every one that you<br />
type, try changing the Echo selection.<br />
· Break Length - the duration of a Break signal sent by <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! through a serial (modem) connection. The<br />
duration ranges from 10 to 2000 milliseconds; the default is 500.<br />
If <strong>STN</strong> does not recognize the Break signal, you may need to<br />
increase this value. If the Break signal disconnects you from your<br />
network, you may need to decrease this value.<br />
· Speed (bps) - the serial port speed used to connect to your<br />
modem. The speed may range from 300 to 57600 bits per second.<br />
Select the highest speed that your modem supports.
3–16 <strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup<br />
· Flow Control - the type of flow control, e.g., None, Software<br />
(XON/XOFF), Hardware (RTS/CTS), to be used. Flow Control is<br />
used to prevent the overflow and loss of data from an online host.<br />
Hardware is the default and should be used in most cases. Data<br />
loss may occur if this setting is not synchronized <strong>with</strong> your<br />
modem’s settings.<br />
· Data bits, Stop bits, and Parity - select to identify the number of<br />
data bits in each byte sent or received, the minimum number of<br />
bits sent after each byte, and the parity. 8, 1.0, and NONE are<br />
nearly always the best choices and are the defaults. Use 7, 1.0,<br />
and EVEN when the maximum modem speed is lower than 9600<br />
baud.<br />
· Dial - the type of dialing to be used: Tone, Pulse (rotary), or<br />
Manual. If Manual is specified, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
issues a message and waits for you to manually dial the<br />
telephone.<br />
· Primary Phone # - the telephone number for the network provider<br />
you selected.<br />
· Secondary Phone # - an alternate telephone number for your<br />
network provider that is used if the primary phone number fails to<br />
connect.<br />
Advanced (Communications Settings)<br />
The Advanced option in the Communications Settings section of the<br />
Setup Definition dialog box is used to provide information used by three<br />
different features of <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!. They are:<br />
· connecting to <strong>STN</strong> through a telnet gateway, firewall, or proxy<br />
server. Refer to Appendix F for details.<br />
· sending an initialization string to a modem<br />
· sending a character string instead of a standard Break command
Click the Advanced button to open the Advanced dialog box.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup 3–17<br />
Enter the appropriate information. Click OK when all specifications are<br />
entered. Or click Cancel to cancel all the specifications.<br />
Modem Configuration<br />
Enter values in the Modem Configuration section to define an<br />
Initialization String for the modem. If you specify a value in this field,<br />
the string is sent to the modem before the dial command is issued,<br />
and a response of OK is expected. See your modem manual for<br />
details about modem commands and options. NOTE: Not<br />
recommended if you have selected the name of your modem from the<br />
Connect via list.<br />
The Phone # field in the Modem Configuration section normally<br />
displays the value of the Primary Phone # for this path. For the<br />
special case when the phone number fields in the Communication<br />
Settings area are not available, e.g., for Winsock connections to a<br />
network modem pool, use this field to specify a telephone number.<br />
Other<br />
Enter the appropriate value in the Break sequence text box to define<br />
a character string that you want <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! to use as<br />
a Break indication to an online host. This value is needed only for<br />
systems that do not support a standard Break.
3–18 <strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup<br />
Custom Logon<br />
Use custom logon when <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> does not support the network you<br />
choose, i.e., if the telecommunications network you use to connect to <strong>STN</strong><br />
is not in the Logon Method Standard list. A custom logon method is also<br />
appropriate if you must use a combination of supported networks.<br />
A custom logon requires you to select scripts to tell <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! how to connect to <strong>STN</strong>. Scripts typically are used to execute a<br />
step in the logon process. For example, one script might have the modem<br />
dial a telephone number and connect to a telecommunications and<br />
network a second script may connect to <strong>STN</strong> through that network. Always<br />
use the <strong>STN</strong>LOGON script to log on to <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
You may also write your own script to connect through an unsupported<br />
network. For information on writing scripts, refer to Appendix C, Script<br />
Language.<br />
To create a custom logon procedure, click the radio button next to<br />
Custom in the Logon Method section. Then click the Configure button.<br />
The Custom Logon dialog box is displayed.<br />
The Scripts Folder box displays a list of scripts from either the <strong>User</strong> or<br />
Standard scripts folder. The Standard scripts folder corresponds to the<br />
Predefined Scripts folder in General Preferences. The <strong>User</strong> scripts<br />
folder corresponds to the <strong>User</strong> Scripts folder in General Preferences.<br />
The Selected script list box displays the scripts that have been selected<br />
for this custom logon setup. The scripts will be executed in the order<br />
shown as part of the connect and logon process. To change the order of<br />
the scripts in the Selected script list, select a script and click the up (▲)<br />
or down (▼) arrow to move the script name one position at a time.
<strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup 3–19<br />
To add a script to the logon procedure, select (highlight) a script in the<br />
Scripts Folder list. Then click the Copy>> button to copy the script to the<br />
Selected script list. Click the Watch Me button to insert the watchme.sc<br />
script into the Selected script list window. The watchme.sc script can be<br />
used more than once in the Selected script list. For more information,<br />
refer to the Watch Me section later in this chapter.<br />
Click the Delete button to delete a script from the Selected script list.<br />
Click the View button to display the actual script for a script name that you<br />
select from the Scripts Folder window.<br />
Click OK to when you have completed your entries to the Selected script<br />
list window and to return to the Setup Definition dialog box. The scripts<br />
you selected are displayed in the Custom Logon Script List box.<br />
Watch Me<br />
For some custom logon methods, a custom-written script is needed. You<br />
may write the script yourself, but it may be more efficient to let Watch Me<br />
write it for you. The Watch Me function creates a script by recording the<br />
commands that you enter from the keyboard and the network’s responses<br />
when you log on to a network.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! begins the Watch Me function when it finds<br />
the script named watchme.sc as the name of the script that it is ready to<br />
execute. After watchme.sc is found, you are prompted to enter the name<br />
of the new script that is to be created. (After Watch Me has finished,<br />
watchme.sc is replaced <strong>with</strong> the new script in the Custom Logon Script<br />
List.)<br />
A dialog box <strong>with</strong> two buttons, Stop and Cancel is displayed. An <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! script is created in this window and is generated<br />
from the commands entered from the keyboard and from the prompts<br />
received from the host system. The script continues to be created until<br />
you click Stop.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! continues executing the next script listed in<br />
the Selected scripts list window located in the Custom Logon dialog<br />
box. The next time you log on using this setup, your newly created script<br />
will run, executing the commands recorded during the Watch Me function.<br />
Click Cancel, at any time, to cancel the Watch Me function <strong>with</strong>out<br />
creating the new script.
3–20 <strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup<br />
Custom logoff<br />
Use a custom logoff procedure when the method to disconnect from an<br />
online host is not successful or is not supported by the standard logoff<br />
method.<br />
The Logoff Method section in the Setup Definition dialog box defines<br />
how <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! will disconnect the communications path<br />
when you log off from an online host.<br />
When you log off, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! scans the output from the<br />
host system looking for the logoff messages defined under the Host<br />
Settings tab in the Setup Definition dialog box. When it locates a<br />
message, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! knows that is has logged off of the<br />
remote system. It then disconnects the communication path using the<br />
method defined in this section.<br />
☞ If the communication path is not disconnected correctly, you may get<br />
a “Communication Port In Use” error when you try to use a program<br />
that requires the use of a communication port.<br />
The steps for defining a custom logoff are nearly identical to that for<br />
defining a custom logon. Refer to Custom Logon in this chapter for<br />
details.<br />
Managing<br />
Setups<br />
Open the <strong>STN</strong> Setup dialog box by clicking the Setup button in the main<br />
toolbar or by clicking Setup | Connections.
<strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup 3–21<br />
Modifying a setup<br />
To modify an existing logon setup, select a setup from the Setup Names<br />
list in the <strong>STN</strong> Setup dialog box. Then click Modify. The Setup Definition<br />
dialog box is displayed, as well as the values you selected for this setup.<br />
Change any value. Then click OK to accept the changes or Cancel to<br />
cancel the changes. You are returned to the <strong>STN</strong> Setup dialog box.<br />
To save your changes, click Save. To test your changes before saving, or<br />
to use those changes for only that <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> session, click OK. You<br />
will be prompted to save the configuration when you exit <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>!. If you do not want to continue using these changes in<br />
subsequent sessions, click NO when prompted.<br />
Copying a setup<br />
To make a copy of a setup, select a setup from the Setup Names list in<br />
the <strong>STN</strong> Setup dialog box. Then click Duplicate. An Enter new name<br />
dialog box is displayed. Type a new name. Then click OK.<br />
The new setup is listed in the <strong>STN</strong> Setup dialog box. Select the new setup<br />
and click Save. Then click OK. You can modify a copied setup to<br />
efficiently create a new setup.<br />
Deleting a setup<br />
To delete a setup, select a setup from the Setup Names list in the <strong>STN</strong><br />
Setup dialog box. Then click Delete. A <strong>STN</strong> Setup dialog box is displayed<br />
that asks you to confirm the deletion. Click Yes to delete the setup or No<br />
to cancel the request.<br />
If you click Yes, the setup is removed from the list displayed in the <strong>STN</strong><br />
Setup dialog box.<br />
Password<br />
protecting setups<br />
The Password Options section in the <strong>STN</strong> Setup dialog box allows you<br />
to password protect access to your <strong>STN</strong> Setup dialog box.<br />
Click in the Password Protected check box in the Password Options<br />
section. Then click Set Password. The Password Protect dialog box is<br />
displayed.<br />
☞ The password is not displayed. Therefore typing it twice confirms<br />
that you have entered it correctly.<br />
Click OK. You are returned to the <strong>STN</strong> Setup dialog box.<br />
If the Password Protected option is enabled, you are prompted to enter<br />
this password when you access Setup.<br />
☞ Your password is required only once per <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! session.
3–22 <strong>STN</strong> Logon Setup<br />
Changing setup password<br />
To change an existing setup password, click the Set Password button in<br />
the Password Options section of <strong>STN</strong> Setup dialog box. The Password<br />
Protect dialog box is displayed.<br />
Type your current password in the Old Password text box. Then type<br />
your new password in the New Password text box. Reenter your new<br />
password in the Retype New Password text box.<br />
Then click OK. You are returned to the <strong>STN</strong> Setup dialog box.<br />
Disabling setup password<br />
To disable your setup password, click in the Password Protected<br />
check box located in the Password Options section of the <strong>STN</strong> Setup<br />
dialog box. The is removed. A password is no longer required when<br />
entering the <strong>STN</strong> Setup dialog box.
4<br />
Online Session on <strong>STN</strong><br />
Online Session on <strong>STN</strong> 4–1<br />
Overview<br />
This chapter covers the following topics:<br />
• Connecting to <strong>STN</strong><br />
• Capturing transcript<br />
• <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window – Toolbar<br />
• <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window – Status Bar<br />
• Using the Online menu<br />
• Entering commands<br />
• Managing transcripts while online<br />
• Viewing downloaded images<br />
• Searching <strong>STN</strong> <strong>with</strong> the <strong>Discover</strong>! wizards<br />
Connecting<br />
to <strong>STN</strong><br />
1. Click Logon on the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Main Menu or the Toolbar.<br />
2. The Select Logon Settings dialog box is displayed, if you have more<br />
than one setup.<br />
If you have only one setup created, this dialog box is not displayed.<br />
Select a setup name and click OK.
4–2 Online Session on <strong>STN</strong><br />
Capturing<br />
Transcript<br />
The Capture Session dialog box is displayed at login.<br />
To capture your online session as a transcript, type a name for the<br />
session in the File name text box and click Open. The default type format<br />
is *.trn. Select another file type, e.g., RTF (Rich Text Format) if you want<br />
your transcript captured in Rich Text Format.<br />
Refer to the Appendix A. Preferences for information on how to change<br />
the default file type for capturing transcripts.<br />
Click Cancel to continue the logon process <strong>with</strong> no transcript.<br />
If you choose the name for an existing transcript, a message is displayed<br />
asking if you want to append or overwrite the existing transcript. You may<br />
also cancel session capture.
Online Session on <strong>STN</strong> 4–3<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Online<br />
and Results<br />
Window<br />
When the connection to <strong>STN</strong> is completed, the <strong>STN</strong> arrow prompt (=>) is<br />
displayed in the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window. Online interaction <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>STN</strong> occurs in the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window.<br />
The <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window contains:<br />
Content<br />
• the Menu bar<br />
• the Toolbar<br />
• the text area for entering commands<br />
• the Status Bar
4–4 Online Session on <strong>STN</strong><br />
Toolbar<br />
The Toolbar displays buttons for quick access to tools and menu options.<br />
You can display the name and function for a particular button. Hover the<br />
cursor over the button to have its function displayed in the Status Bar.<br />
The tool buttons include:<br />
Begin a new online session (Logon)<br />
Open transcript<br />
Edit transcript<br />
Turn off transcript capture<br />
Print<br />
Copy the selected area to the clipboard<br />
Paste the clipboard content to the screen<br />
Report Tool
Online Session on <strong>STN</strong> 4–5<br />
Table Tool<br />
Predefined Report Tool<br />
Scroll to previous command in the session<br />
Scroll forward to next command in the session<br />
Upload structure query<br />
Activate the Command Window<br />
Run Command File<br />
Send break to online host<br />
Hyperlink all CAS Registry Numbers while connected to <strong>STN</strong><br />
Send Logoff command to online host<br />
Force Send-Click, enter your command and press Enter<br />
Switch to <strong>STN</strong> Structure Drawing<br />
Set <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results Preferences<br />
View online help documents or request help by email
4–6 Online Session on <strong>STN</strong><br />
You may easily customize the Toolbar by removing or adding tool buttons.<br />
Adding tool buttons to the Toolbar<br />
To add a tool button, follow these steps:<br />
1. Right-click in the space on the toolbar where you want to add a<br />
button. The Toolbar Preferences dialog box appears. The option<br />
“Remove button or gap from toolbar” is always the initial option. Click<br />
Next.<br />
2. Click Next to view the buttons one at a time. Continue to click Next<br />
until you see the desired button.
3. Click OK to choose the displayed button for the toolbar.<br />
Online Session on <strong>STN</strong> 4–7<br />
4. The new button is displayed on the toolbar in the slot you have<br />
selected.<br />
Removing tool buttons from the Toolbar<br />
To remove a tool button or a gap from the toolbar, follow these steps:<br />
1. Right-click on the button that you want to remove.<br />
2. In the Toolbar Preferences dialog box, click OK.<br />
The tool button that you have selected is now removed from the Toolbar.
4–8 Online Session on <strong>STN</strong><br />
Status Bar<br />
The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results<br />
window.<br />
Status Bar Item<br />
<strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
Transcript<br />
File Name<br />
INS/OVR<br />
Hold On/Hold Off<br />
Print Off/Print On<br />
Online<br />
Running timer<br />
Function<br />
Displays a pop-up menu for the <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
wizards<br />
Displays the directory path and the file name<br />
for your transcript. If you are not capturing a<br />
transcript, click on transcript to start capture.<br />
Displays the current <strong>STN</strong> file. Click this box to<br />
display a pop-up menu <strong>with</strong> recently entered<br />
files or to select From a List of files.<br />
Click this box to change from the insert or<br />
overwrite mode for entering text.<br />
Toggle to Hold On to stop the screen from<br />
continuously scrolling. Toggle to Hold Off to<br />
resume scrolling.<br />
Print On activates slave printing of information<br />
on the terminal window. Print Off turns off<br />
printing.<br />
Indicates an active session; the green color<br />
indicates ready and red indicates busy. Offline<br />
indicates terminated communication.<br />
Displays the total amount of time you have been<br />
connected in your online session.<br />
For information on how you can customize the Status Bar, refer to<br />
Appendix A. Preferences.
Online Session on <strong>STN</strong> 4–9<br />
Using the<br />
Online Menu<br />
Only the non-greyed options in the Online menu are available while you<br />
are connected to <strong>STN</strong>.
4–10 Online Session on <strong>STN</strong><br />
Online menu option<br />
Recall Command<br />
Use Pagination Mode/<br />
Use Continuous Scroll<br />
Show Text Structures/<br />
Show Graphics Structures<br />
Suppress Screen Display/<br />
Restore Screen Display<br />
Send Break<br />
Prompt Override<br />
Terminal Mode<br />
Kermit Send<br />
Kermit Receive<br />
Logoff<br />
Logoff Hold<br />
Command Window<br />
Function<br />
Recall the last command you typed online.<br />
You may use this command repeatedly to<br />
recall prior commands from the same<br />
session, or to edit a line to create a new<br />
command. Use the Up Arrow/Down Arrow<br />
keys as shortcuts.<br />
Toggle to control the scrolling of your<br />
online display data. Pagination Mode<br />
holds a screen temporarily. To continue<br />
displaying the next screen, click the Hold<br />
On box in the Status bar.<br />
Toggle to display text or graphics<br />
structures.<br />
Toggle to control the output display in a<br />
terminal window. Suppress Screen<br />
Display prevents <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> from<br />
updating the window <strong>with</strong> new data; this<br />
increases the speed at which you may<br />
capture results.<br />
Send a break to interrupt a host system<br />
process.<br />
Moves your cursor to the line directly<br />
below the prompt and makes <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
ready to accept a typed command.<br />
Use to change terminal emulation if you<br />
want to access non-<strong>STN</strong> hosts.<br />
Upload text or binary files using the Kermit<br />
protocol.<br />
Download a file from a host system.<br />
Disconnect from an online host.<br />
Disconnect from <strong>STN</strong> temporarily.<br />
Open a separate window for entering<br />
commands to your online host.
Online Session on <strong>STN</strong> 4–11<br />
Entering<br />
Commands<br />
You may enter <strong>STN</strong> commands in the following ways:<br />
• by typing them at an arrow prompt (=>) in the text area of the <strong>STN</strong><br />
Online and Results window<br />
• by using the Command Window<br />
• by using scripts<br />
Entering<br />
commands in<br />
the Command<br />
Window<br />
In the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window you can create a separate window<br />
for entering commands by typing them or by inserting the contents of a<br />
file.<br />
To open a Command Window, select Command Window from the Online<br />
menu or the tool button<br />
from the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results toolbar.<br />
To enter commands in the Command Window:<br />
1. Keep this button from the right toolbar of the Command Window<br />
in the locked position. In the locked mode, you can type a series of<br />
commands and edit them.<br />
2. To send the commands in the Command Window to <strong>STN</strong>, use the<br />
buttons from the right toolbar of the Command Window:<br />
Button<br />
Function<br />
To send one command line at a time<br />
To send multiple command lines.
4–12 Online Session on <strong>STN</strong><br />
Inserting a command file into Command Window<br />
To insert the contents of another file (<strong>with</strong> commands):<br />
1. Click the Open button, located on the left toolbar<br />
2. Open a command file name in the dialog box to insert the contents of<br />
the command file into the Command Window.<br />
Saving the content of the Command Window<br />
Click the Save button located on the left toolbar in the Command<br />
Window to save the contents of the Command Window to a file.<br />
Clearing the content of the Command Window<br />
To clear the contents of the Command Window, click the Clear button<br />
located on the left toolbar in the Command File Window.<br />
Using scripts<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> includes a script language that lets you automate online<br />
tasks. Refer to Appendix C for information about the script language.<br />
The Query menu in the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window online provides<br />
options for using scripts.<br />
Option<br />
Prepare Command File<br />
Check Command File<br />
Run Command File<br />
Function<br />
Create a script of commands for<br />
entering in your online session. Refer<br />
to Appendix C for information on the<br />
script language.<br />
Check a script for errors.<br />
Execute a previously prepared script.
Online Session on <strong>STN</strong> 4–13<br />
Using Predefined<br />
Search Strategies<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> provides a number of predefined search strategies that you<br />
can use or edit.<br />
To access the predefined search strategies, select Use Predefined<br />
Search Strategy from the Query menu.<br />
Managing<br />
Transcripts<br />
While Online<br />
While you are connected to <strong>STN</strong>, the Results menu offers the following<br />
options for managing transcripts in a toggle mode.<br />
Option<br />
Capture Session<br />
Print Session<br />
Start New Page<br />
Edit Transcript<br />
Function<br />
Capture text and graphics of your<br />
online session to a file.<br />
Print the session as it occurs (slave<br />
mode).<br />
Insert a page break into the transcript<br />
or a slave print.<br />
Edit the text of an existing (already<br />
created) transcript file. Refer to<br />
Chapter 10 for information.
4–14 Online Session on <strong>STN</strong><br />
Viewing<br />
Downloaded<br />
Images<br />
Some <strong>STN</strong> files include technical drawings, chemical structures,<br />
trademarks, complete pages of publications, and other graphical images.<br />
These images are different from chemical structure diagrams in, for<br />
example, the Registry file because each image is downloaded into a<br />
separate file. Downloaded images may be in one of three file formats:<br />
Image Format<br />
TIFF<br />
JPEG<br />
GIF<br />
File Extension<br />
.tif<br />
.jpg<br />
.gif<br />
When you display records on <strong>STN</strong> using display formats that include<br />
images, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> automatically downloads the images to your PC.<br />
The files are named according to the name of your transcript, a sequential<br />
number, and the appropriate extension for the image type.<br />
For example, if your transcript is named silane.trn, the first TIFF image<br />
downloaded is named silane001.tif. If the next image is a GIF image, it is<br />
named silane002.gif. If you are not capturing a transcript, the image files<br />
are named IMAGE001.TIF, etc.<br />
When you browse a transcript offline, you have the option of viewing all<br />
the downloaded images in the context of your transcript.<br />
Viewing JPEG<br />
and GIF Images<br />
Online<br />
JPEG and GIF are common image file formats. Use your own image or<br />
graphics software to view individual JPEG and GIF images.<br />
QuickTime TM is provided <strong>with</strong> the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>6.0</strong> software to allow you<br />
to view JPEG and GIF images in transcripts, reports, and tables.
Online Session on <strong>STN</strong> 4–15<br />
Viewing TIFF<br />
images online<br />
To view a TIFF Image while online, select View TIFF image from the File<br />
menu or click the View TIFF Image button from the <strong>STN</strong> Online and<br />
Results Toolbar. A TIFF File dialog box is displayed.<br />
Select a file name and click Open. The image is displayed in the TIFF<br />
File Display window.
4–16 Online Session on <strong>STN</strong><br />
View menu options<br />
The View menu in the TIFF File Display window provides a number of<br />
options for viewing the TIFF images.<br />
Option<br />
Zoom In<br />
Zoom Out<br />
Function<br />
Enlarge the size of the image<br />
Reduce the size of the image<br />
Rotate Change the orientation of the image, 90<br />
degrees, clockwise<br />
Flip Horizontal<br />
Flip Vertical<br />
Display the image 180 degrees<br />
opposite its horizontal axis<br />
Display the image 180 degrees<br />
opposite its vertical axis
Online Session on <strong>STN</strong> 4–17<br />
File menu options<br />
The File menu in the TIFF File Display window contains the following<br />
options for displaying and printing images.<br />
Option<br />
Open<br />
Previous Image<br />
Next Image<br />
Print<br />
Print Setup<br />
Exit<br />
Function<br />
View the image<br />
View the preceding image in a series<br />
View the next image in a series<br />
Print the image. The size of the printed<br />
image is determined by the zoom<br />
setting; zoom in for a larger printed<br />
image, zoom out for a smaller printed<br />
image.<br />
Modify the printer setup<br />
Exit the TIFF File Display
4–18 Online Session on <strong>STN</strong><br />
Mode menu options<br />
You may also use the Mode menu to change the display of the images.<br />
Searching<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
Wizards<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! enables you to use wizards, rather than type<br />
commands, for some functions. Click the <strong>Discover</strong>! button<br />
at the bottom of the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window to see<br />
the <strong>Discover</strong>! wizards menu.<br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! menu
Online Session on <strong>STN</strong> 4–19<br />
Searching<br />
hyperlinked data<br />
<strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
To make it easy to retrieve data automatically, various items in <strong>STN</strong> search<br />
results are hyperlinked by default, such as the following:<br />
• CAS Registry Numbers<br />
• Patent numbers<br />
• OS (Other Source) field<br />
• Full-text options.<br />
For example, the hyperlinking of CAS Registry Numbers makes it easy to<br />
obtain additional data. Simply click on the hyperlinked CAS Registry<br />
Number.<br />
A pop-up menu is displayed. Select an option from the pop-up menu.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! enters the appropriate files, conducts<br />
searches, and returns the requested substance data.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! even “remembers” the last CAS Registry<br />
Number that you have selected. When you right-click, a pop-up menu<br />
displays again, showing you the previously selected CAS Registry<br />
Number.<br />
ANALYZE wizard<br />
While you are connected to <strong>STN</strong>, you may also use the ANALYZE wizard<br />
to display the analyzed fields from search results as a histogram. Follow<br />
these steps.<br />
1. Click the <strong>Discover</strong>! button. Select Analyze Answers from the<br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! menu.
4–20 Online Session on <strong>STN</strong><br />
2. The ANALYZE wizard is invoked. Click Next.<br />
3. Highlight the answer set for analyzing. Click Next.
Online Session on <strong>STN</strong> 4–21<br />
4. Select the field to analyze. Click Analyze.<br />
5. Select the range of terms to analyze. Click Display.
4–22 Online Session on <strong>STN</strong><br />
6. The analyzed results are displayed as a histogram.<br />
To display the answers from the histogram, click on one of the boxes<br />
on the left and click the Display these answers button.<br />
To print the histogram, click the Print button.<br />
To save the histogram, click Save As.<br />
7. If you click Save As, the Select Analyze Results File dialog box is<br />
displayed. Enter the name for the saved file and select the format,<br />
e.g., Excel Files.
Online Session on <strong>STN</strong> 4–23<br />
8. The saved results are displayed as a bar graph in Microsoft Excel.
5<br />
Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts<br />
Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts 5–1<br />
Overview<br />
In addition to <strong>STN</strong>, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! provides automatic logon<br />
and other features for the following “supported” online hosts:<br />
DIMDI<br />
Datastar<br />
Dialog<br />
EINS<br />
NLM<br />
Ovid<br />
Questel·Orbit<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> also lets you define host settings for other, “unsupported”<br />
online hosts so that automatic features will function. In addition, manual<br />
emulation, <strong>with</strong> no automatic features, can be used to connect to any<br />
computer or online host.<br />
This chapter covers the following topics:<br />
· Logon setups for supported non-<strong>STN</strong> hosts<br />
· Logon setups for other hosts<br />
· Online session on non-<strong>STN</strong> hosts<br />
Refer to Chapter 3 for information about logon setups for <strong>STN</strong> and general<br />
information about managing setups. Refer to Chapter 4 for information on<br />
online session on <strong>STN</strong>.
5–2 Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts<br />
Logon Setup<br />
for Supported<br />
non-<strong>STN</strong><br />
Hosts<br />
To create a new logon setup for a supported host, click the Setup<br />
button on the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Toolbar or click the Setup menu and select<br />
Connections. The <strong>STN</strong> Setup dialog box opens. Click New to open the<br />
Setup Definition dialog box.<br />
Creating a logon<br />
setup<br />
Basic logon<br />
setup values<br />
Setup Name<br />
The Setup Name identifies a specific setup. The name must be 20<br />
characters or fewer and can include any combination of letters, numbers,<br />
special characters, and spaces. Suggested setup names help identify the<br />
host (Questel, in this example) and communication path (COM1), e.g.,<br />
Questel via modem.<br />
Host Name<br />
The Host Name identifies the online host that you want to access in this<br />
setup.<br />
Login ID<br />
Enter your login ID for the online host you selected in the Login ID text<br />
box. Entering a login ID at this time is optional. If you do not enter it here,<br />
you will be prompted to enter it when you log on to the host<br />
Password<br />
Enter your host password in the Password box. For security, an asterisk is<br />
displayed for each password character you type. Your password is stored<br />
in the express.ini file in an encrypted form. Entering a password at this<br />
time is optional. If you do not enter it here, you will be prompted to enter<br />
when you log on to the host.<br />
Path Tabs<br />
Select Path 1 to define the communication path to reach the online host<br />
you selected. Select Paths 2-4, as needed, to define alternate<br />
communication paths to the online host. When <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> tries to
Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts 5–3<br />
connect to the host, it first uses Path 1. If Path 1 fails to connect, <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> tries the next path until the connection is made or there are no<br />
more paths to try.<br />
+ Only Path 1 is available when the Host Name is set to Manual<br />
Emulation.<br />
The Host Settings tab, to the right of the Path tabs, contains settings that<br />
are specific to the selected online host. Usually these settings do not need<br />
to be changed. Refer to the Host Settings section later in this chapter for<br />
details.<br />
Connect via<br />
Select a communication method from the Connect via pulldown menu to<br />
connect to the online host you selected.<br />
The method that you choose controls the information that is required in<br />
the Communication Settings section. This is described further in the<br />
Advanced Communications Settings section, later in this chapter.<br />
Connect via options are:<br />
· Winsock (Internet) - select if your network software supports<br />
Windows Sockets and Telnet from your PC (most do). When<br />
selected, the Host Name or IP Address, Port, and Echo fields are<br />
displayed. Overwrite the host name or host address, if different<br />
from the default (rare). Set Echo to No if you do not want <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! to echo characters as they are typed. The<br />
Port setting of 23 (Standard Telnet) in most cases should not be<br />
changed.<br />
· Dial-Up Networking - <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! lists all<br />
connections defined in Windows Dial-Up Networking. Dial-Up<br />
Networking connections are most commonly used to define<br />
connections to the Internet via an Internet Service Provider (ISP).<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! will then attempt to use the Standard<br />
Windows interface to Dial-Up Networking (in WININET.DLL) when<br />
a logon is attempted. You will be prompted to connect to your ISP<br />
as needed. NOTE: Winsock is the underlying connection type for<br />
this option.<br />
· Modem - <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! lists all modems installed in<br />
the Windows Modems Control Panel. This option eliminates the<br />
need to set many of the modem options, because this information<br />
is obtained directly from Windows. Most users will only need to<br />
specify a phone number for this option. NOTE: If you cannot<br />
make a connection using this method, try using a COM Port<br />
option.<br />
· COM1, COM2, COM3, or COM4 - select to connect via a serial<br />
port, e.g., to a modem, terminal server, host system.
5–4 Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts<br />
Standard Logon<br />
and Logoff<br />
methods<br />
The logon method includes connecting to the online host and logging on to<br />
the host. Use a Standard Logon Method to connect to a supported host<br />
system via one of the supported networks. Use a Custom Logon Method<br />
when you connect via an unsupported network and when you log on to an<br />
unsupported host. A custom logon method is also needed for certain<br />
combinations of supported networks, such as when a network modem pool<br />
is reachable by a Winsock connection. See Custom Logon and Logoff<br />
later in this chapter for details.<br />
Standard Logon<br />
To use a standard logon procedure, click the radio button next to<br />
Standard in the Logon Method section and select one of the supported<br />
networks from the pulldown menu. <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
automatically inserts the scripts necessary to connect to the network and<br />
the host you selected, and also inserts the values that the scripts require.<br />
Modify these values, as needed.<br />
For example, if a setup is defined to connect to DIMDI host via Tymnet,<br />
using a tone or pulse modem, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! selects several<br />
scripts from the Scripts folder including the following:<br />
· a script that sends dial commands to a modem<br />
· a script that connects to DIMDI via the Tymnet<br />
telecommunications network<br />
· a script that logs on to DIMDI<br />
+ If you are connecting via a gateway or firewall that requires a<br />
separate logon, see Settings for Winsock (Internet) Setup for<br />
Supported non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts later in this chapter and Appendix F.<br />
Standard Logoff<br />
Click the radio button next to Standard in the Setup Definition dialog box<br />
to tell <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! to use the “discnct” script to disconnect<br />
the communication path. This script handles most connections, including<br />
those made through a modem and via Winsock. If <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! does not correctly disconnect the communication path, you will<br />
need to define a custom logoff. See Custom Logon and Logoff later in<br />
this chapter for more information.
Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts 5–5<br />
Network Logon<br />
The Network Logon section in the Setup Definition dialog box is displayed<br />
when <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! recognizes that the Host Name and<br />
Connect via combination you selected require information to make the<br />
network connection. You may need to enter any of the following values:<br />
· NUA (Network <strong>User</strong> Address) - the address of the host on the<br />
network you selected. The value may be a character string, e.g.,<br />
stnc, or a numerical string, e.g., 03106001467<br />
· NUI (Network <strong>User</strong> Identifier) - a character string that identifies<br />
the user to the network. Some networks require this.<br />
· NUP (Network <strong>User</strong> Password) - a password to confirm the<br />
identity of the user on the network. Some networks require this.<br />
To keep the NUP entry secure, only asterisks are displayed when you<br />
type this value. It is stored in the express.ini file in encrypted form. To<br />
confirm your NUP, you are prompted to re-enter the password after you<br />
select OK from the Setup Definition dialog box.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! provides default NUA values for a limited<br />
number of combinations of hosts and networks. If a default value is not<br />
available for the combination you have selected, an error message is<br />
displayed when you try to use the setup. If this occurs, return to the Setup<br />
Definition dialog box. Then select the path that failed and fill in the NUA<br />
field.<br />
Settings for<br />
Winsock<br />
(Internet) setup<br />
for supported<br />
non-<strong>STN</strong> hosts<br />
When Connect via is Winsock or a Dial-up Networking item, settings<br />
specfic to Internet TCP/IP connections are available. The settings are<br />
· Host Name or IP Address - the name or address of the host<br />
computer to which <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> will connect. For example<br />
dialog.com or 192.132.3.254. These values are provided<br />
automatically for supported online hosts.<br />
If you must connect to the host through a telnet gateway, enter the<br />
name or IP address of the gateway and see Appendix F for more<br />
information.<br />
· Port - the TCP/IP port number for telnet (Winsock) connections.<br />
The default is 23, and you should change this only if your<br />
organization has a firewall that uses a different port for the telnet<br />
protocol.<br />
· Echo - the duplex setting that specifies whether to echo<br />
characters as they are typed. If you cannot see the characters<br />
you are typing or if you see two characters for every one that you<br />
type, try changing the Echo selection.
5–6 Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts<br />
Modem settings<br />
for supported<br />
non-<strong>STN</strong> hosts<br />
When a modem or COM port is selected in the Connect via list, the<br />
Communications Settings section of the Setup Definition dialog box<br />
contains modem communication parameters.<br />
The following settings are available:<br />
· Echo - the duplex setting that specifies whether to echo<br />
characters as they are typed. If you cannot see the characters<br />
you are typing or if you see two characters for every one that you<br />
type, try changing the Echo selection.<br />
· Break Length - the duration of a Break signal sent by <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! through a serial (modem) connection. The<br />
duration ranges from 10 to 2000 milliseconds; the default is 500.<br />
If the online host does not recognize the Break signal, you may<br />
need to increase this value. If the Break command disconnects<br />
you from your network, you may need to decrease this value.<br />
· Dial - the type of dialing to be used: Tone, Pulse (rotary), or<br />
Manual. If Manual is specified, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
issues a message and waits for you to manually dial the<br />
telephone.<br />
· Primary Phone # - the telephone number for the network provider<br />
you selected.<br />
· Secondary Phone # - an alternate telephone number for the<br />
network provider, used if the primary phone number fails to<br />
connect.<br />
Use the Windows Modems Control panel to change other communication<br />
settings.
Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts 5–7<br />
Connect via COM<br />
port settings<br />
The following settings are available:<br />
· Echo - specifies whether to echo characters as they are typed. If<br />
you cannot see the characters you are typing or if you see two<br />
characters for every one that you type, try changing the Echo<br />
selection.<br />
· Break Length - the duration of a Break signal sent by <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! through a serial (modem) connection. The<br />
duration ranges from 10 to 2000 milliseconds; the default is 500.<br />
If the online host does not recognize the Break signal, you may<br />
need to increase this value. If the Break command disconnects<br />
you from your network, you may need to decrease this value<br />
· Speed (bps) - the serial port speed used to connect to your<br />
modem. The speed may range from 300 to 57600 bits per<br />
second. If your modem’s maximum speed is not listed, select next<br />
higher speed.<br />
· Flow Control – the method of synchronizing communications<br />
between the PC, modem, and online host. Flow Control is used to<br />
prevent the overflow and loss of data from an online host.<br />
Hardware is the default and should be used in most cases. Data<br />
loss may occur if this setting is not synchronized <strong>with</strong> your<br />
modem’s settings.<br />
· Data bits, Stop bits, and Parity - data transfer settings. Data<br />
bits 8, Stop bits 1.0, and Parity NONE are nearly always the best<br />
choices and are the defaults. Use 7, 1.0, and EVEN when the<br />
maximum modem speed is lower than 9600 baud.
5–8 Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts<br />
· Dial - the type of dialing to be used: Tone, Pulse (rotary), or<br />
Manual. If Manual is specified, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
issues a message and waits for you to manually dial the<br />
telephone.<br />
· Primary Phone # - the primary telephone number for the network<br />
provider<br />
· Secondary Phone # - an alternate telephone number for the<br />
network provider.<br />
Advanced<br />
Communication<br />
Settings<br />
The Advanced option in the Communications Settings section of the Setup<br />
Definition dialog box is used to provide information used by three distinct<br />
features of <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!. They are:<br />
· Connecting to an online host through a telnet gateway, firewall, or<br />
proxy server. Refer to Appendix F for details.<br />
· Sending an initialization string to a modem<br />
· Sending a character string instead of a standard Break command<br />
Advanced<br />
dialog box<br />
Click the Advanced button to open the Advanced dialog box.<br />
Enter the appropriate information. Click OK when all specifications are<br />
entered. Or click Cancel to cancel all changes.
Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts 5–9<br />
Advanced dialog<br />
box values<br />
Modem Configuration<br />
Enter values in the Modem Configuration section to define an<br />
Initialization String for the modem. If you specify a value in this field, the<br />
string is sent to the modem before the dial command is issued, and a<br />
response of OK is expected. See your modem manual for details about<br />
modem commands and options. NOTE: Not recommended if you have<br />
selected the name of your modem from the Connect via list.<br />
The Phone # box in the Modem Configuration section normally displays<br />
the value of the Primary Phone # for this path. For the special case when<br />
the phone number fields in the Communication Settings area are not<br />
available, e.g., for Winsock connections to a network modem pool, use<br />
this field to specify a telephone number.<br />
Other<br />
Enter the appropriate value in the Break sequence text box to define a<br />
character string that you want <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! to use as a<br />
break indication to an online host. This value is needed only for systems<br />
that do not support a standard break.<br />
Host Settings<br />
Select the Host Settings tab to see settings that are specific to the<br />
selected online host. Some of the settings enable features such as<br />
automatic logon to the host.<br />
+ Fields in the Host Settings tab are unique to the host that you<br />
select.<br />
+ The Host Settings tab is not available when you select Manual<br />
Emulation from the Host Name pulldown menu.<br />
Host Prompts<br />
The Host Prompts window may list up to five prompts issued by the host<br />
you select. <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! uses this information to determine<br />
when the host is ready to receive the next command. This supports several<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! features, such as the Command Window and<br />
command line recall while you are logged on.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! provides default values in the fields for the<br />
online hosts in the Host Name list. For <strong>STN</strong> hosts, these default values<br />
cannot be changed. For other hosts, these default values can be changed,<br />
although caution is advised.
5–10 Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts<br />
When searching for a host prompt, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! looks for<br />
an exact match <strong>with</strong> one of these strings, including blanks and control<br />
characters. The search begins <strong>with</strong> the last character received from the<br />
host and works backward for the length of the string. The following<br />
conventions are used to represent special characters in these strings:<br />
# - any string of digits, e.g., “102”, or the “#” character<br />
- Blank (represented by a space)<br />
[M - Carriage return<br />
[Q - Control Q (XON) character<br />
[J - Line feed<br />
[[ - One left square bracket (“[“)<br />
Logoff Messages<br />
The Logoff Messages window lists up to five text strings that are issued by<br />
the host at logoff. <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! uses this information to<br />
determine when the session <strong>with</strong> the host has ended. When this happens,<br />
the processing defined in the Logoff Method section of the Setup<br />
Definition dialog box is executed and your connection is closed.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! provides default values in the Logoff<br />
Messages window for the host listed in the Host Name field. For <strong>STN</strong><br />
hosts, these default values cannot be changed. For other hosts, these<br />
default values can be changed, although caution is advised.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! looks for an exact match <strong>with</strong> one of the<br />
Logoff Messages strings to any of the data received from the host. This<br />
match includes looking for any trailing blanks. Matching of control<br />
characters is not supported.<br />
Command<br />
Window<br />
Click a Ö in the Command Window box to enable <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! to open a Command Window when you log on to a host. The<br />
Command Window can also be turned off and on while logged on to an<br />
online host.<br />
Click a Ö in the Close Window at logoff box to tell <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! to close the session window after you log off the host. If you<br />
prefer to scroll back through your session or capture a transcript after you<br />
log off, do not select this option.<br />
Highlight ON<br />
Sequence<br />
Enter a character string in the Highlight ON Sequence text box to tell <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! how the host system will indicate hit term<br />
highlighting during an online session and when browsing a transcript. The<br />
string you enter must be unique as highlighting is indicated at any point<br />
where this term appears. Matching of control characters is not currently<br />
supported.
Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts 5–11<br />
Highlight OFF<br />
Sequence<br />
Enter a character string in the Highlight OFF Sequence text box to tell <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! how the host system will indicate the end of a<br />
highlighted term. Matching of control characters is not currently<br />
supported.<br />
Execute at first<br />
Host Prompt<br />
window<br />
Up to five commands may be entered in the Execute at first Host Prompt<br />
window. The first command is sent when the first host prompt is received,<br />
and the remaining commands are sent, one at a time, <strong>with</strong> each<br />
succeeding the host prompt.<br />
By default, a carriage return is sent after each line. The keyword NOCR<br />
may be added as the last word on the last line that you enter to indicate<br />
that this line is to be displayed in the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window, but<br />
not sent. This allows you to enter data after the defined character string,<br />
before it is sent.<br />
Choice of Service<br />
and Language<br />
options<br />
The Choice of Service and Language options are displayed only if you<br />
have selected Questel from the Host Name pulldown menu. The Choice of<br />
Service value should be from 1 to 6 characters in length and is sent at the<br />
first Questel prompt. The language you enter is the language in which you<br />
want to interact <strong>with</strong> Questel.<br />
+ For the Markush DARC service, the language is not set automatically<br />
at logon because of the time required to do this. However, the script<br />
Qst_op.sc, located in the Scripts folder, can be run after logging on to<br />
set the language and other options used by this service. If you access<br />
this feature frequently, copy the Qst_op.sc script to the <strong>User</strong> Scripts<br />
folder to access it more easily. See Appendix C, for instructions on<br />
running an <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! script.<br />
Logon Setups<br />
for Other<br />
Hosts<br />
To create a setup for a host that is not currently supported by <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!, either select Manual Emulation or Other from<br />
the Host Name pulldown menu in the Setup Definition dialog box.<br />
Select the Manual Emulation host name to create a setup that does not<br />
use any of the automatic features, e.g., automatic logon, host prompt<br />
recognition, special handling of host highlighting characters, of <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!. When selected, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
requires only values in the Communications Settings section of the <strong>STN</strong><br />
Setup dialog box.
5–12 Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts<br />
Manual Emulation<br />
Use the Manual Emulation mode to bypass the automatic features of <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!. In this case, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! only<br />
allows for terminal emulation, <strong>with</strong>out automatic dialing, automatic logon,<br />
etc.<br />
To create a Manual Emulation setup:<br />
1. Type a name in the Setup Name text box<br />
2. Select Manual Emulation from the Host Name pulldown menu<br />
3. Select the appropriate connection method from the Connect via<br />
pulldown menu<br />
4. Modify the values for the Communications Settings if necessary<br />
5. Click OK.<br />
Other as host<br />
name<br />
Select the host name Other to create a setup for a host that is not in the<br />
Host Name list. A Custom Logon Method is required. You may click the<br />
Host Settings tab to define the host prompts, logoff messages, and<br />
highlight characters.<br />
Use the Other mode to create a setup that supports some of the automatic<br />
features of <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!. However, you must provide a<br />
script for logging on to the host, and you must provide the values needed<br />
in the Host Settings tab of the Setup Definition dialog box.<br />
To create a setup for another host:<br />
1. Type a name in the Setup Name text box<br />
2. Select Other from the Host Name pulldown menu<br />
3. Click the radio button next to Custom in the Logon Method section.<br />
Then click Configure.<br />
4. Click the Watch Me button to create a script for logging on the host<br />
system. Then click OK.<br />
5. Click the Host Settings tab and fill in the Host Prompts fields<br />
If you leave the Host Prompts fields blank, you will be able to interact<br />
<strong>with</strong> the host, but features such as the Command Window will not<br />
work.<br />
6. Optionally, fill in the values in the Logoff Messages field on the Host<br />
Settings tab<br />
If you do not add a message to the Logoff Messages fields, <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! may not disconnect the session after logoff.<br />
You can disconnect the session manually by selecting Drop DTR<br />
from the Online menu or by closing the window that contains the<br />
online session.<br />
7. Optionally, fill in the values in the Highlight ON Sequence and<br />
Highlight OFF Sequence text fields<br />
8. Click OK.
Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts 5–13<br />
Custom<br />
Logon and<br />
Logoff<br />
Use custom logon and logoff methods when <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> does not support<br />
the telecommunications network or online host you choose. If you write<br />
your own logon or logoff scripts, review the Predefined Setup Variables<br />
section in Appendix C. Script Language.<br />
A custom logon requires you to select scripts to tell <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! how to connect to your network and host. Scripts typically are<br />
used to execute a step in the logon process. For example, one script might<br />
have the modem dial a telephone number and connect to a network; a<br />
second script may connect through the network; a third script may log on<br />
to the host.<br />
Custom Logon<br />
To create a custom logon procedure, click the radio button next to<br />
Custom in the Logon Method section. Then click the Configure button.<br />
The Custom Logon dialog box is displayed. The Scripts Folder box<br />
displays a list of scripts from either the <strong>User</strong> or Standard Scripts folder.<br />
The Standard scripts folder corresponds to the Predefined Scripts folder<br />
in General Preferences. The <strong>User</strong> scripts folder corresponds to the <strong>User</strong><br />
Scripts folder in General Preferences.<br />
The Selected script list box displays the scripts that have been selected<br />
for this custom logon setup. The scripts will be executed in the order<br />
shown as part of the connect and logon process. To change the order of<br />
the scripts in the Selected script list, select a script and click the up (s)<br />
or down (t) arrow to move the script name one position at a time.<br />
To add a script to the logon procedure, select (highlight) a script in the<br />
Scripts Folder list. Then click the Copy>> button to copy the script to the<br />
Selected script list. Click the Watch Me button to insert the watchme.sc<br />
script into the Selected script list window. The watchme.sc script can be<br />
used more than once in the Selected script list. For more information,<br />
refer to the Watch Me section later in this chapter.<br />
Click the Delete button to delete a script from the Selected script list.<br />
Click the View button to display the actual script for a script name that you<br />
select from the Scripts Folder window.<br />
Click OK to when you have completed your entries to the Selected script<br />
list window and to return to the Setup Definition dialog box. The scripts<br />
you selected are displayed in the Custom Logon Script List box.
5–14 Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts<br />
Custom Logoff<br />
Use a custom logoff procedure when the method to disconnect from an<br />
online host is not successful or is not supported by the standard logoff<br />
method.<br />
The Logoff Method section in the Setup Definition dialog box defines<br />
how <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! will disconnect the communications path<br />
when you log off from an online host.<br />
When you log off, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! scans the output from the<br />
host system looking for the logoff messages defined under the Host<br />
Settings tab in the Setup Definition dialog box. When it locates a<br />
message, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! knows that is has logged off of the<br />
remote system. It then disconnects the communication path using the<br />
method defined in this section.<br />
+ If the communication path is not disconnected correctly, you may get<br />
a “Communication Port In Use” error when you try to use a program<br />
that requires the use of a communication port.<br />
The steps for defining a custom logoff are nearly identical to that for<br />
defining a custom logon. Refer to Custom Logon in this chapter for<br />
details.<br />
Online<br />
Session on<br />
non-<strong>STN</strong><br />
Hosts<br />
The <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results menus vary <strong>with</strong><br />
the online host that is used. Because <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! is<br />
specifically designed for <strong>STN</strong>, more online features and commands are<br />
available when connecting to <strong>STN</strong>. Basic features, such as capturing a<br />
transcript and sending a break to interrupt the host, are available for any<br />
online host.<br />
The File and Edit menus function the same for all online services.<br />
The Online and Terminal menus provide similar commands for controlling<br />
your online or terminal session.<br />
The Query menu provides commands to take advantage of special<br />
features while online to <strong>STN</strong> or Questel. These include uploading structure<br />
queries, running command files (including WPI strategies), and using<br />
predefined search strategies.<br />
The Results menu is used to capture items displayed in the terminal<br />
window to a file. Use these files to browse, print, edit, or export.
Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts 5–15<br />
Terminal menu<br />
The Terminal menu is available if you are connected to a vendor other<br />
than the seven non-<strong>STN</strong> hosts supported by <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
and when you are logged on through manual emulation.
5–16 Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts<br />
Terminal menu<br />
options<br />
Option<br />
Use Pagination Mode<br />
Use Continuous Scroll Mode<br />
Suppress Screen Display<br />
Send Break (Ctrl+B)<br />
Prompt Override (Ctrl+Enter)<br />
Terminal Mode<br />
VT320 Settings<br />
VT320 Keyboard<br />
Setup Terminal Parameters<br />
Result<br />
Pause after displaying a window full of<br />
information. Click Hold On in the status<br />
bar to display the next page.<br />
Display information from the online host<br />
continuously, <strong>with</strong>out pausing.<br />
Stop the display of information in the<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window. Even<br />
when transcript capture is on, no<br />
information is saved in the transcript file<br />
when Suppress Screen Display is<br />
selected.<br />
Send a break signal to the online host to<br />
interrupt a command or another function<br />
If <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> does not recognize a<br />
host prompt, it will not let you type a<br />
command. Use Prompt Override to let<br />
you type.<br />
Specify the terminal emulation mode.<br />
See Terminal Mode later in this chapter<br />
for more information.<br />
Specify terminal settings when using<br />
VT320 terminal emulation. See VT320<br />
Settings later in this chapter for details.<br />
Specify the keyboard configuration when<br />
using VT320 terminal emulation. See<br />
VT320 Keyboard later in this chapter for<br />
details.<br />
Select communications settings for<br />
certain types of modem connections.<br />
Refer to the Setup Terminal Parameters<br />
section later in this chapter for more<br />
information.
Terminal menu<br />
options<br />
(continued)<br />
Option<br />
Kermit Send<br />
Kermit Receive<br />
Logoff<br />
Execute Script<br />
Watch Me<br />
Drop DTR<br />
Raise DTR<br />
Command Window<br />
Result<br />
Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts 5–17<br />
Upload a file to an online host. <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> can send text or binary files.<br />
Kermit protocol is used <strong>with</strong> the timeout<br />
interval of 10 and the packet size of 94.<br />
Download a text or binary file from the<br />
online host. A packet size of 4000 is<br />
recommended.<br />
This option is not available for Manual<br />
Emulation or for setups defined using the<br />
Other host name.<br />
Run a script written in the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
script language. For information, refer to<br />
Appendix C, Script Language.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! records all<br />
activities from your online session into a<br />
script file. The Watch Me menu item is<br />
a toggle switch.<br />
Set the modem’s Data Terminal Ready<br />
circuit to OFF.<br />
Set the modem’s Data Terminal Ready<br />
signal to ON.<br />
Open a box at the bottom of your online<br />
window that can be used to type<br />
commands and other functions. The<br />
Command Window is available for all<br />
hosts, but you must define the host<br />
prompts in the logon setup (Host<br />
Settings tab) for all features of the<br />
command window to work properly.
5–18 Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts<br />
Terminal Mode<br />
Options<br />
Three terminal emulation modes are available:<br />
· TTY<br />
· Tek41xx<br />
· VT320<br />
The Terminal Emulation modes interpret escape sequences in the data<br />
stream. These direct the receiving terminal either to perform a particular<br />
operation or to interpret characters. An escape sequence is one or more<br />
characters that are transmitted to define a specific control function. When<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! receives characters from a remote host, the<br />
selected terminal mode interprets them accordingly.<br />
+ The Hold On/Hold Off and Capture commands function in all three<br />
emulation modes.<br />
TTY mode<br />
TTY is the default terminal mode. It supports a number of <strong>STN</strong>-specific<br />
escape sequences.
Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts 5–19<br />
Tek41xx mode<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! supports the basic Tektronix 4100 sequences.<br />
The graphics operations are supported <strong>with</strong> line vectors and text.<br />
Advanced graphics features such as Graphtext rotation, pixel copying,<br />
rectangle filling, and others are not supported.<br />
The Tek41xx emulation is based on a 1024 by 768 coordinate system. If<br />
this exceeds the screen dimensions of your display, you may lose some<br />
definition when mapping the coordinate system. Maximizing the <strong>STN</strong><br />
Online and Results window is advised.<br />
Although standard Tek4100 escape sequences for printing are not<br />
supported by <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!, you may capture the data to a<br />
transcript file to print later. If the current transcript file is SESSION.TRN,<br />
the TEK data are captured to the file SESSION.TEK. This file may be<br />
browsed or printed in the normal manner.<br />
Three basic modes support this emulation. Switching between these<br />
modes is performed transparently and automatically by escape sequences<br />
that are sent by the host.<br />
1. Alpha Mode - When your terminal is in the Alpha Mode, it<br />
interprets received characters and displays ASCII characters.<br />
When the cursor reaches the bottom of the display screen, the<br />
display scrolls to allow you to view the incoming data.<br />
2. Vector Mode - When your terminal is in the Vector Mode, the<br />
incoming characters are interpreted as a series of XY coordinate<br />
positions. The emulator moves the current graphics position to the<br />
first XY position and draws lines (vectors) to any subsequent<br />
positions. Graphics are displayed at the XY positions.<br />
3. GIN Mode - When your emulator receives the ENABLE 4010 GIN<br />
command from its host, it displays a cross-hair cursor. Position<br />
the cursor at the required location and then press a key or click<br />
your mouse button. The emulator sends a 4010 GIN REPORT.<br />
This escape sequence contains details of the key pressed and the<br />
current cursor position.<br />
It is typical for the host to have previously entered the Vector Mode to<br />
draw the input screen <strong>with</strong> text. Options are displayed at set locations on<br />
the screen. The host application can map the GIN REPORT key/<br />
coordinate combination to carry out specific actions.
5–20 Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts<br />
VT320 mode<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! supports limited DEC VT320 terminal<br />
functions. It supports basic 80 or 132 column mode <strong>with</strong> 24 lines. It does<br />
not support printing, selective erase, soft character sets, user-defined<br />
keys, or the 25th status line. The cursor position (line and column) is<br />
displayed on the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results status bar.<br />
Although printing is using VT320 escape sequences is not supported,<br />
standard <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! print features are available. Save<br />
your data to a transcript and print the transcript file or use the Print<br />
Selected option on the File menu while online.<br />
When you are in the VT320 Mode, VT320 Settings and the VT320<br />
Keyboard options are enabled in the Terminal menu.<br />
VT320 Settings<br />
Select VT320 Settings from the Terminal menu to change specific<br />
display options. The Terminal Settings dialog box is displayed.<br />
· Number of Columns - sets the terminal width to either 80 or 132<br />
columns. The default is 80. Some VT320 applications can operate<br />
in either 80 or 132 column mode.<br />
· Terminal Modes - includes the following terminal options:<br />
Line Wrap - if selected, received characters are<br />
automatically wrapped onto the next line. If not selected,<br />
characters received after the last allowable character on a<br />
line overwrite existing characters.<br />
Local Echo - if selected, keyboard characters are displayed<br />
on the screen and sent to the host. The host does not need to<br />
echo the characters. If not selected, the host is responsible<br />
for sending the characters back to the terminal for display.<br />
Auto-repeat - if selected, you may hold a key and that key is<br />
sent repeatedly to the host. If not selected, only one character<br />
is sent to the host each time a key is pressed.
Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts 5–21<br />
· Backspace - determines which character to send the host when<br />
the backspace key is pressed. Select BS to send a backspace<br />
character (8) to the host. Or, select DEL to send a delete<br />
character (127) to the host.<br />
· End of line - determines which character to send the host when<br />
the carriage return key is pressed. CR sends only a carriage<br />
return character, and CR/L sends a carriage return followed by a<br />
linefeed.<br />
· Control - select 8bit to obtain faster control sequences. The data<br />
path to the host must recognize 8-bit characters. If problems<br />
occur, select 7bit. All hosts recognize 7-bit characters.<br />
After you change one or more options, click OK to save and use the<br />
settings.<br />
VT320 Keyboard<br />
Select VT320 Keyboard to change keyboard options. The Keyboard<br />
dialog box is displayed.<br />
· Keypad - determines which character to send the host when a<br />
key on the numeric keypad is pressed. Select Numeric to<br />
transmit the actual character you press, i.e., number, comma,<br />
plus sign. Select Application to transmit a standard sequence of<br />
characters to the host. These characters are not user-definable.<br />
· Cursor Keys - select Normal to send standard ANSI cursor<br />
sequences. Select Application to send an application sequence<br />
of characters to the host.<br />
· Cursor - select Blanked to hide the cursor. Select Visible to<br />
show the cursor.<br />
· Cursor Type - select Block or Underline cursor style.<br />
After you change one or more options, click OK to save and use them.
5–22 Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts<br />
Setup Terminal<br />
Parameters<br />
Setup Terminal Parameters is active only when the logon setup Host<br />
Name is Manual or Other and a COM port is selected in Connect via. A<br />
Communications Settings for Terminal Emulation dialog box is<br />
displayed.<br />
Change the settings to meet your communication needs. When you have<br />
modified your communications settings, click OK to save and use the<br />
settings.
Structure Queries 6–1<br />
6<br />
Structure Queries<br />
Structure queries may be built in the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
Structure Drawing program. Structures may be drawn as Standard,<br />
Specinfo, WPI, and Questel structure types.<br />
The basic structure-building techniques are discussed in this chapter and<br />
are applicable to all structure types, including reaction queries.<br />
Chemical structures may be built offline. This is the best economic<br />
approach as no connect time or online costs are incurred as you<br />
construct the query. Simply draw the structure. Then during an online<br />
session, upload the query by selecting Upload Structure Query from the<br />
Query menu.<br />
For extensive documentation and training on structure searching<br />
strategies, contact your Customer Service representative.<br />
Launching<br />
Structure<br />
Drawing<br />
Select Prepare Structure Query from the Query menu or click the<br />
Prepare Query button on your Toolbar. The Structure Drawing program<br />
opens, along <strong>with</strong> a new Untitled “Standard” window.
6–2 Structure Queries<br />
The Structure Drawing window includes its own Structure Drawing menu<br />
bar. These menus contain the commands and subcommands to access<br />
structure drawing tools. It also contains toolbars and a tool palette that<br />
give quick access to drawing tools, atoms, and bonds.<br />
Atoms &<br />
Bonds<br />
Toolbar<br />
The Atoms & Bonds Toolbar provides quick and easy access to common<br />
atoms and bonds. If atoms or bonds that you need are not located here,<br />
access the Draw menu in Structure Drawing.<br />
☞ The term “atom” is frequently used in this <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> to refer to<br />
atoms, variables, shortcuts, G-groups, and the points of attachment<br />
for G-group fragments.<br />
Current<br />
Atom Box<br />
Common Atoms<br />
Current<br />
Bond Box<br />
Common<br />
Bonds<br />
Reset<br />
Atom/Bond<br />
The Current<br />
Atom Box<br />
The Current Atom box displays the symbol of the current atom that is<br />
being used. This symbol is inserted into the ring or chain that you draw.<br />
The default atom is C, carbon.<br />
Right-click in the Current Atom box to display the Atom Selection dialog<br />
box.<br />
Type a new atom in the Symbol text box or use the scroll bar to locate the<br />
atom you need.
Structure Queries 6–3<br />
Then click Single Use to insert the selected atom one time. Click Multiple<br />
Use to insert the atom more than once and retain it as your default. Click<br />
a ✓ in the Exclude box to exclude the selected atom from retrieved<br />
substances during an online search. Click Cancel to cancel the Atom<br />
Selection request.<br />
You may also left-click in the Current Atom box to display either the<br />
Periodic Table dialog box, the Atom Selection dialog box, or the List<br />
dialog box. These dialog boxes are used to select atoms for single or<br />
multiple use in a structure drawing. The dialog box that displays depends<br />
on the selection in the Drawing section of your Structure Drawing<br />
Preferences. Refer to The Preferences! Menu section, later in this<br />
chapter, for more details.<br />
The Common<br />
Atoms<br />
The Common Atoms are icons for those atoms that are most frequently<br />
used in structure drawing.<br />
Single-click an atom icon to insert it into a structure once. After you insert<br />
the atom, the previous default atom is reset in the Current Atom box.<br />
Double-click an atom icon to insert it into a structure more than once and<br />
to retain it as your atom default.<br />
You may customize the Common Atoms to include the atoms you most<br />
commonly use. To do so, right-click on an atom that you want to replace.<br />
The Atom Selection dialog box is displayed. Locate and click the atom<br />
you want to insert on the palette. Then click OK. The atom you selected<br />
permanently replaces the atom that was previously in that position.<br />
The Current<br />
Bond Box<br />
The Current Bond Box displays the bonds that you are currently inserting<br />
into your structure. To select another bond, click in the Current Bond<br />
box. The Bond Selection dialog box is displayed.<br />
The radio button of the current bond is selected. To choose a different<br />
bond, click the radio button next to that bond.
6–4 Structure Queries<br />
Then click Multiple Use to insert the bond more than once and to retain it<br />
as your default selection. Click Single Use to insert the bond once. After<br />
you insert the bond, the previous default bond is reset in the Current<br />
Bond box. Or click Cancel to cancel the request.<br />
The Common<br />
Bonds<br />
The Common Bonds are the bonds you most often used in structure<br />
drawing. If a common bond is your current default, it is highlighted and is<br />
also displayed in your Current Bond box. By default, the single bond and<br />
the double bond appear in the palette.<br />
Single-click the Single bond or the Double bond to insert it into your<br />
structure once. After you insert the bond, the previous default bond is<br />
reset in the Current Bond box. Or double -click the Single bond or<br />
Double bond to insert it into your structure more than once and to retain<br />
it as your default bond.<br />
Click on the Current Bond box to display the Bond Selection dialog box.<br />
Select a different bond by clicking the appropriate radio button. Click<br />
Multiple Use or Single Use. Refer to the previous section for more<br />
details.<br />
To customize one of the common bonds, right-click on either existing<br />
common bond. The Bond Selection dialog box is displayed. Select a<br />
bond and click OK. The bond you select becomes a common bond.<br />
Reset Atom/Bond<br />
Defaults<br />
Click the Reset Atom/Bond button to quickly return to the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
<strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! Structure Drawing atom and bond defaults. The atom<br />
default is C, carbon, and the bond default is a single bond.<br />
☞ You may also press the Spacebar to reset the atom/bond defaults.<br />
Toolbar<br />
(Function<br />
Keys & Menu<br />
Shortcuts)<br />
The Toolbar provides quick and easy access to common file functions and<br />
to menu shortcuts. These tools are also located in various menus <strong>with</strong>in<br />
Structure Drawing.
Structure Queries 6–5<br />
Customizing the<br />
Toolbar<br />
You may customize this toolbar by right-clicking on any button shown or in<br />
a vacant button position. This displays the Structure Drawing Toolbar<br />
Preferences dialog box.<br />
A tool button is displayed along <strong>with</strong> a description of its function in the<br />
Description section of the dialog box.<br />
If you right-click on a specific button or a specific vacancy (toolbar gap),<br />
click OK to replace the button or gap. Or, click Next to display the next<br />
button. When you locate a button you want to insert in the button position<br />
that you clicked, click OK. Or, click Cancel to cancel this request.<br />
You may also click Previous to backtrack to a button you already viewed.<br />
You may also customize the position of the Toolbar by left-clicking a gap<br />
on the tool bar. A selection box is displayed.<br />
Drag your cursor over a selection to highlight it. Then click to select that<br />
option. The positions include:<br />
• Vertical/Horizontal - select to display the Toolbar horizontally,<br />
above the Structure Drawing window<br />
• Double Line/Single Line - select to display the Toolbar in a single<br />
line or a double line<br />
• Close - select to close the Toolbar<br />
☞ If you close the Toolbar, you must access the Layout tab of<br />
Structure Drawing Preferences and then click Visible in the Toolbar<br />
section to display it.<br />
☞ You may also customize Toolbar positioning in the Layout option of<br />
Structure Drawing Preferences.
6–6 Structure Queries<br />
List of Toolbar<br />
Buttons<br />
Toolbar Button<br />
Description<br />
Open a new Standard <strong>STN</strong> structure drawing window<br />
Open a new SpecInfo <strong>STN</strong> structure drawing window<br />
Open a new WPI <strong>STN</strong> structure drawing window<br />
Open a new Questel structure drawing window<br />
Save the current structure<br />
Save the current structure <strong>with</strong> a new name<br />
Open existing structure drawing queries<br />
Display the carbon atoms as C, dots, or angles<br />
Toggle the Query Attribute pop-up display, i.e., point your cursor on<br />
any item in a query and its attributes are described<br />
Print the current structure query<br />
Set Structure Drawing Preferences<br />
Verify the query’s attributes<br />
Cut the selected structure or structure fragment and place it on the<br />
clipboard<br />
Copy the selected structure or structure fragment and place it on the<br />
clipboard<br />
Paste the clipboard contents into the current structure query<br />
Fuse two structures or structure fragments together<br />
Undo the last action<br />
Center the structure in the Structure Drawing window
Structure Queries 6–7<br />
Toolbar Button<br />
Description<br />
Display the Shortcut menu, which contains shortcuts to insert one or<br />
more times in your query<br />
Display the Variable Selection menu, which contains a variable to<br />
insert one or more times in your query<br />
Toggle the use of the reaction drawing mode<br />
Toggle the use of the Functional Group drawing mode<br />
Show Structure Drawing Help<br />
Analyze the structure query and suggest filters<br />
View existing filters<br />
Return to original application<br />
Fast return to main program<br />
View the existing Functional Group command file<br />
Switch to <strong>STN</strong> Terminal Emulation mode and logon to an online<br />
vendor
6–8 Structure Queries<br />
Tool Palette<br />
The Tool Palette provides the tools used to create or modify structure<br />
queries.<br />
☞ The Reaction and the Functional Group drawing tools are located on<br />
the Tool Palette and are activated when you click the RXN button or<br />
the FG button on the Toolbar.<br />
Pencil Tool<br />
Ring Tool<br />
Chain Tool<br />
Eraser Tool<br />
Selection Tool<br />
Lasso Tool<br />
Text Tool<br />
Reaction Arrow Tool<br />
Reaction Role Tool<br />
Reaction Site Tool<br />
Atom Mapping Tool<br />
Functional Group Tool<br />
OR Tool for Functional<br />
Groups<br />
- draw atoms/bonds using the current atom/bond<br />
- draw 3 - 15 member ring systems<br />
- draw 1 - 30 member chains<br />
- delete objects in the structure query<br />
- select (highlight) objects in the structure query<br />
- select (grab) objects in the structure to move<br />
- add text to your screen (not searched)<br />
- set up a chemical reaction between structures<br />
- specify the roles of the participants in a reaction<br />
- specify which bonds change in a reaction<br />
- specify correspondence between atoms in reactant and product<br />
- add functional groups in a query for CASREACT on <strong>STN</strong><br />
- link functional groups <strong>with</strong> an OR operator<br />
Customizing the<br />
Tool Palette<br />
You may customize the position of the Tool Palette by left-clicking the open<br />
position in the tool palette. A small selection box is displayed.<br />
Drag your cursor over a selection to highlight it. Then click to select that<br />
option. The positions include:<br />
• Horizontal/Vertical - select to display the Tool Palette<br />
horizontally, above the Structure Drawing window<br />
• Double Line/Single Line - select to display the Tool Palette in a<br />
single line or a double line<br />
• Close - select to close the Tool Palette<br />
☞ If you close the Tool Palette, you must access the Layout option of<br />
Structure Drawing Preferences and then click Visible from the<br />
Palette section to display it.<br />
☞ You may also customize Tool Palette positioning in the Layout option<br />
of Structure Drawing Preferences.
Structure Queries 6–9<br />
Pencil Tool<br />
The Pencil tool is used to place or change atoms or bonds. Click the<br />
Pencil tool to activate the pencil to draw atoms and bonds <strong>with</strong> the current<br />
atom/bond. When you click the Pencil tool, the cursor changes to<br />
resemble a pencil.<br />
To draw one node bonded to another node:<br />
1. Place the pencil where you want the first node to appear.<br />
2. Press and hold the mouse button and drag the cursor to the point<br />
where you want the second node. Release the mouse button.<br />
When placing a carbon atom (the default atom), the display of the carbon<br />
is determined by a setting in the Drawing options of your Structure<br />
Drawing Preferences. Settings include C, dot, or angle. To change the<br />
display of carbons for a specific instance, select Carbons from the<br />
Display menu.<br />
To change a node:<br />
1. Click a common atom from the Common Atoms Palette, select<br />
Atom, Shortcut, Variables, or G-groups from the Draw menu,<br />
click in the Current Atom box to select an atom, or right-click in<br />
the Current Atom box to type an atom, shortcut, variable, or G-<br />
group.<br />
2. Place the pencil tip on the node that you want to change. An A<br />
appears inside the pencil when the pencil tip is on a node. Click<br />
and the node changes to the current atom.<br />
To change an existing bond:<br />
1. Click a bond from the Common Bonds Palette to select a single<br />
or a double bond. Or, display the Bond Selection dialog box by<br />
selecting Bond from the Draw menu or clicking in the Current<br />
Bond box.<br />
☞ If you display the Bond Selection dialog box, click the radio<br />
button next to the bond that you want and then click Multiple Use<br />
or Single Use.<br />
2. Place the pencil tip on the bond that you want to change. A line<br />
appears inside the pencil when the pencil tip is on a bond. Click<br />
and the bond changes to the current bond.
6–10 Structure Queries<br />
Ring Tool<br />
The Ring tool is used to draw 3 - 15 membered rings. When you click the<br />
Ring tool, the Ring Description dialog box is displayed.<br />
Type a number from 3 to 15 to specify the size of the ring you want to<br />
draw or type a ring system. You may also select the ring size or ring<br />
system that you want from the scrolling list. A 6-membered ring is the<br />
default. You may also select one of the common rings by clicking the ring<br />
icon that you want.<br />
To draw a ring:<br />
1. Type a ring size/ring system and click OK or click a ring icon.<br />
The cursor changes to a 6-membered ring.<br />
2. Place the ring cursor where you want to insert the ring and click.<br />
The ring appears in the Structure Drawing window.<br />
☞ When drawing SPECINFO queries, the rings <strong>with</strong> alternating<br />
double and single bonds are drawn <strong>with</strong> special aromatic bonds.<br />
Shortcut: To quickly set the Ring tool to the default 6-membered ring,<br />
right-click on the Ring tool.<br />
Shortcut: In the drawing area, left-click to place the ring <strong>with</strong> all single<br />
bonds. Right-click to place the ring <strong>with</strong> alternating single and double<br />
bonds. For example, left-click for cyclohexane and right-click for<br />
benzene.
Structure Queries 6–11<br />
Spiro Rings<br />
To draw a spiro ring system, i.e., two rings that share a single common<br />
node, create the first ring. Then center the + in the ring cursor directly on<br />
the node to be shared. Then click.<br />
Cyclohexane Ring<br />
Two Cyclohexane Rings<br />
in a Spiro Ring System<br />
Fused Rings<br />
To draw two rings that are fused together, i.e., two rings that share a<br />
common bond, center the + in the ring cursor on the middle of the bond to<br />
be shared and click.<br />
Cyclohexane Ring Two fused Cyclohexane Rings<br />
Ring Systems<br />
Type a shorthand ring system description in the Ring Description box or<br />
select a ring system from the scrolling list.<br />
A shorthand ring system description includes the number of nodes in each<br />
ring in the system. By default, rings are fused to one another from left to<br />
right, e.g., 65 indicates a 6-membered ring fused to a 5-membered ring<br />
<strong>with</strong> the 5-membered ring on the right. Ring sizes of 4 through 6 are<br />
allowed.<br />
Optional U (Up) and D (Down) indicators modify the direction of ring<br />
fusion. U moves the location of the fused bond up (counter-clockwise)<br />
one bond. D moves the location of the fused bond down one bond.<br />
Additional fusion continues in the new direction until the direction is<br />
changed. Direction indicators are not allowed when the shorthand<br />
includes a ring of size 4.<br />
For example, type 66U6D5 for the steroid ring system.
6–12 Structure Queries<br />
Then click OK and left-click in the drawing area.<br />
Chain Tool<br />
The Chain tool is used to draw chains of lengths ranging from 1 to 30<br />
atoms. When you click the Chain tool, the Chain Length dialog box is<br />
displayed. The default chain length is 1.<br />
Type a number from 1 to 30 or select a number from the scrollable list.<br />
Then click OK. Your cursor changes to resemble a chain.<br />
To draw a chain, place the chain arrowhead where you want it to appear<br />
and click your mouse button. The chain is inserted into your structure<br />
drawing.<br />
To insert a chain of a different size, click the Chain tool again. Enter a<br />
new chain length in the Chain Length dialog box. Click OK.<br />
You may attach a chain to another chain or to a ring by placing the<br />
arrowhead of the chain cursor where you want to attach the chain. Then<br />
click your mouse button.<br />
☞ <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! attempts to position the chain logically. If<br />
the chain could overwrite another atom, an error message is<br />
displayed and the chain is not placed.<br />
Shortcut: To quickly choose a chain length of 1, right-click the Chain<br />
tool on the Tool Palette. Then place your cursor in the drawing area.<br />
Left-click to place the chain.
Structure Queries 6–13<br />
Eraser Tool<br />
The Eraser tool is used to delete an atom or bond from your structure.<br />
When you click the Eraser tool, the cursor changes to resemble a pencil<br />
eraser.<br />
To use the Eraser tool, click its icon.<br />
To remove an atom, position the tip of the eraser on an atom. An A<br />
appears in the pencil section of the eraser when the cursor is on an atom.<br />
Click and the atom and any bonds attached to it are removed.<br />
To remove a bond, position the tip of the eraser on a bond. A line appears<br />
in the pencil section of the eraser when the cursor is on a bond. Click<br />
and the bond is removed. To cause the atoms at the ends of the bond to<br />
be removed also, select Delete Atoms <strong>with</strong> Bonds on the Drawing tab of<br />
Structure Drawing Preferences.<br />
Selection Tool<br />
The Selection tool is used to select individual atoms, bonds, or structure<br />
fragments or entire structures. Selected items may be cut, copied,<br />
deleted, or assigned attributes. If a shortcut is selected, you may reverse<br />
it, if applicable.<br />
When you select the Selection tool, the cursor changes to resemble its<br />
icon.<br />
To select a structure or a structure fragment, position the Selection tool<br />
cursor to the top-left point of the structure. Press and hold your mouse<br />
button while you drag the mouse in a direction where the structure is<br />
included in a rectangular box. Then release your mouse button and the<br />
entire structure or structure fragment is selected.<br />
To select a single bond or node, place the Selection tool cursor on the<br />
middle of a bond or on a node. Then click. The bond or node is<br />
highlighted <strong>with</strong> the color specified in your Structure Drawing<br />
Preferences. Refer to the Colors/Fonts Structure Drawing Preferences<br />
section, in this chapter, for more details.<br />
To select more than one item, press the Shift key and click simultaneously<br />
while using the Selection tool. This is useful for selecting several nodes<br />
and bonds that do not fit <strong>with</strong>in a single rectangle.
6–14 Structure Queries<br />
Lasso Tool<br />
The Lasso tool is used to select a structure or segments of a structure in<br />
a free-hand mode. Once selected, you may move, cut, copy, or delete it.<br />
To lasso (select) an object, click the Lasso tool. The cursor changes to<br />
resemble a lasso. Press and hold your mouse button and drag the lasso<br />
cursor around the structure. A line appears around the structure fragment<br />
as you drag the cursor. Release the mouse button when the entire<br />
fragment is enclosed (lassoed).<br />
To move the lassoed structure fragment, place the lasso cursor inside the<br />
lassoed area. The cursor changes to a hand. Press and hold your<br />
mouse button while dragging it to a new location. Release the button and<br />
the selected fragment is redrawn in the new location.<br />
To remove the lassoed structure fragment, select Cut or Clear from the<br />
Edit menu or press your Delete key. The selected fragment is removed<br />
from the structure. If you select Cut, the structure fragment is removed<br />
and placed on your clipboard.<br />
To place a copy of the structure fragment on your clipboard, select Copy<br />
from the Edit menu. The selected fragment is now in the structure and on<br />
your clipboard.<br />
To lasso a single node, align the point of the lasso tail on the node. An A is<br />
displayed inside the lasso cursor when it is touching a node. Click to<br />
select the node. The node is enclosed in a small box.<br />
You may move, copy, cut, or delete a single node just as you would a<br />
structure.<br />
Text Tool<br />
The Text tool is used to add nonsearchable text or labels to your structure<br />
drawings. When you select the Text tool, the cursor changes to resemble<br />
an I-beam.<br />
To enter text or labels to your structure, click the Text tool. Position the<br />
cursor where you want the text to appear and click. Type the text. To add<br />
text in a different area, reposition your cursor and click.<br />
Text is displayed in the system font you are using.<br />
To change the text font, select Preferences from the Structure Drawing<br />
Main Menu bar or click the Preferences button if it is on the Structure<br />
Drawing Toolbar. Then click the Colors/Fonts tab. Deselect the Text<br />
Font=Atom Font box and then click the Text Font button. A Font dialog<br />
box is displayed. Change the font as desired.<br />
To delete text, click the Selection or the Lasso tool. Then select the text.<br />
Press the Backspace key or select Cut from the Edit menu. You may<br />
also use the Eraser tool to remove each block of text.<br />
To relocate text, click the Lasso tool. Select the text you wish to move.<br />
Then drag the selection to a new location.
Structure Queries 6–15<br />
Structure<br />
Drawing Main<br />
Menu Bar<br />
The Structure Drawing Main Menu Bar provides the tools necessary to<br />
create a substance, Markush, or reaction query.<br />
Keyboard shortcuts are available for some commands. They are<br />
displayed on the menus to the right of the commands.<br />
☞ Commands that are grayed are not available for the current<br />
application.<br />
The File Menu<br />
The File menu provides basic structure file and window management<br />
commands.<br />
New<br />
The New command provides four subcommands to open a new, Untitled<br />
structure drawing window for the following structure formats:<br />
• Standard<br />
• SpecInfo<br />
• WPI<br />
• Questel<br />
Open (Ctrl+O)<br />
The Open command opens an existing structure that was previously<br />
saved.<br />
When you select the Open command, a list of saved files is displayed in<br />
the Open Query dialog box. Highlight a file name to see its structure<br />
query <strong>with</strong>in this dialog box and to identify what format, e.g., Standard, it<br />
was saved in. If this is the structure file you want to open, click Open.<br />
Note that you may open several different file types, e.g., MDL molfiles,<br />
DARC, by clicking the Files of type pop-up menu.<br />
☞ You may convert a saved file to a new format by clicking the radio<br />
button next to a format listed in the Convert to section of the dialog<br />
box. Converted structures are opened in a new Untitled window. The<br />
original structure retains its original format.
6–16 Structure Queries<br />
☞ When importing an MDL rxnfile to <strong>STN</strong>, i.e., MDL à <strong>STN</strong>, change<br />
the *.mol to *.rxn in the Open File Name text box. Refer to Appendix<br />
E, MDL Molfile Conversion Assumptions, for more details.<br />
☞ Different version of ISIS/DRAW have different instructions for<br />
copying structures to the clipboard to import to <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>!. Refer to your ISIS/DRAW documentation for more details.<br />
Open File Types<br />
File<br />
Example Applications<br />
Format Extension That Create the Format<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Structure Query .str <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
Chemical Exchange Format .cxf SciFinder<br />
DARC .drc Generic DARC<br />
MDL Molfile .mol ISIS/Draw, ChemDraw,<br />
ChemWindow<br />
SMD .smd ChemDraw<br />
Alchemy .alc Alchemy<br />
Close<br />
The Close command closes the current structure query.<br />
☞ If you close a structure query before you save it, you are prompted to<br />
save.<br />
Browse<br />
Browse allows you to quickly view all of the structure queries you have<br />
saved in your default folder, i.e., the folder you defined in General<br />
Preferences (the folders command is located in the Setup menu on the<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Main Menu bar).<br />
When you select Browse, the Browsing dialog box is displayed.<br />
You may view each saved query at your pace by clicking Next or you can<br />
view them in a continuous fashion by clicking Continuous. You may<br />
modify a structure by clicking Edit.
Structure Queries 6–17<br />
Save (Ctrl+S)<br />
Select Save to save a structure query to the directory of your choice.<br />
After entering a file name and selecting a file type, click OK. A Saving<br />
dialog box is displayed.<br />
Click a ✓ in a box adjacent to an item in black text. Verify Query is<br />
selected by default and is recommended to catch any drawing errors<br />
before you search online. See the Query Verification section, later in this<br />
chapter, for more details.<br />
☞ If G-group orientation and Verify Reaction Specifications are<br />
active and are not selected, the query can only be “Saved<br />
Unsearchable”. These options must be selected, if available, before<br />
you upload a query to an online session.<br />
Save As<br />
Save As allows you to save a structure <strong>with</strong> a new file name and a new<br />
standard file type, e.g., DARC, MDL Molfile, or picture file type, e.g., TIFF,<br />
Metafile.<br />
Save As File Types<br />
File<br />
Example Applications<br />
Format Extension That Read the Format<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Structure Query .str <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
Chemical Exchange Format .cxf SciFinder<br />
DARC .drc Generic DARC<br />
MDL Molfile .mol ISIS/Draw, ChemDraw,<br />
ChemWindows<br />
SMD .smd ChemDraw<br />
SMILES .smi Daylight’s software<br />
PCX image .pcx Paint Shop<br />
Windows Metafile image .wmf Microsoft Word<br />
TIFF image .tif Microsoft Word
6–18 Structure Queries<br />
Page Setup<br />
Page Setup allows you to set page settings for printing.<br />
Print (Ctrl+P)<br />
The Print command prints the current structure.<br />
Exit<br />
This command ends your structure drawing session.<br />
The Edit Menu<br />
The Edit menu provides standard editing commands.
Structure Queries 6–19<br />
Draw Menu for<br />
Structure Drawing<br />
The Draw menu provides commands to help you create structure<br />
drawings. Some of the commands have shortcuts, e.g., left-clicking the<br />
Current Bond box to display the Bond<br />
Selection dialog box.<br />
Bond<br />
Select Bond to display the Bond Selection dialog box.<br />
Click Single Use to insert the bond once. After inserting the bond, the<br />
default returns to the previous bond. Click Multiple Use to insert the bond<br />
and retain it as your default.<br />
Click Cancel to cancel the request.<br />
Atom<br />
Select Atom to display the Dialog Box, Periodic Table, or List of atoms.<br />
The dialog box that displays is the one selected in the Drawing tab of your<br />
Structure Drawing Preferences.<br />
If the Periodic Table is displayed, the atom that is the current default is<br />
highlighted and some of its atomic and physical properties are displayed<br />
as well. Click an atomic symbol to select a different atom. It will become<br />
highlighted and its atomic and physical properties will display. Click<br />
Multiple Use to insert the atom more than once and to retain it as your<br />
default node. Click Single Use to insert the atom once. Or click Cancel<br />
to cancel the request.<br />
If the Dialog Box is selected, the atoms are displayed in a window. Click<br />
the radio button next to the atom you want. Then click Multiple Use to<br />
insert the atom and to retain it as your default node. Click Single Use to<br />
insert the atom once. Or click Cancel to cancel the request.
6–20 Structure Queries<br />
If List is selected, the atoms are available in a scrollable list. Scroll to an<br />
atom and select it or type an atom in the Symbol text box. Then click<br />
Multiple Use to insert the atom and to retain it as your default selection.<br />
Click Single Use to insert the atom once. Or click Cancel to cancel the<br />
request.<br />
Shortcut<br />
Select Shortcut to display the Shortcuts dialog box. This dialog box<br />
displays all available shortcuts for common chemical moieties.<br />
Click the radio button next to the shortcut you want. Then click Multiple<br />
Use to insert the shortcut and to retain it as your default selection. Click<br />
Single Use to insert the shortcut once. Or click Cancel to cancel the<br />
request.<br />
A shortcut <strong>with</strong> a small box next to its radio button indicates a Reversible<br />
Shortcut. If you select a Reversible Shortcut and you wish to reverse its<br />
orientation after inserting it in a structure, select the shortcut <strong>with</strong> the<br />
Selection tool and then choose Reverse Shortcut from the Display<br />
menu.<br />
☞ Shortcuts differ for Questel structure queries.<br />
Variables<br />
Select Variables to display the Variable Selection dialog box. This dialog<br />
box provides a list of the available variable nodes you may insert in a<br />
structure.<br />
Click the radio button next to the variable you want. Then click Multiple<br />
Use to insert the variable and to retain it as your default selection. Click<br />
Single Use to insert the variable once. Or click Cancel to cancel the<br />
request.<br />
☞ The X, M, and Id variables may be excluded from a postion in a query<br />
by clicking the Exclude checkbox.
Structure Queries 6–21<br />
Variable Points<br />
of Attachments<br />
Select Variable Points of Attachment (VPA) to choose multiple possible<br />
sites of attachment for a node on a single ring or a ring system.<br />
For example, use VPA to search for pyridines <strong>with</strong> a chlorine attached at<br />
the 2- or 3-position.<br />
To use VPA:<br />
1. Build a ring or a ring system and build the substituent as a<br />
separate fragment. In the example, draw the pyridine ring and a<br />
chlorine atom.<br />
2. Click the Selection tool and select the node (Cl in the example)<br />
that may attach to the ring or ring system. Also, select the atoms<br />
in the ring where the node may attach.<br />
☞ Hold the Shift key to select multiple items in your structure<br />
window.<br />
3. Select Variable Points of Attachment from the Draw menu.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! draws a “connection” from the<br />
attaching node to the center of the ring or ring system.
6–22 Structure Queries<br />
The allowable points of attachment on the ring are shown as dotted lines to<br />
each ring position. To toggle the display of these attachments, select<br />
Show VPA from the Display menu.<br />
Using G-groups<br />
(Ctrl+G)<br />
Use G-groups to search for structures that have more than one allowable<br />
value at a node, e.g., use a G-group to search for a benzene <strong>with</strong> an N,<br />
O, S, or methyl attached to a given position.<br />
Using G-groups reduces the need to create multiple structures. G-group<br />
definitions can include atoms, shortcuts, variables (<strong>STN</strong> only), other G-<br />
groups, or fragments. When using fragments, you must draw the<br />
fragment and point of attachment first. Then define a new G-group value<br />
or modify an existing one.<br />
☞ G-Groups must contain between 2 and 20 items.<br />
To use a G-group, select G-groups from the Draw menu. The G-<br />
Group Definitions dialog box is displayed. Select a G-group. Click<br />
Single Use or Multiple Use.<br />
Place the Pencil tool cursor on the atom you want to replace <strong>with</strong> the<br />
G-group and click. The G-group is represented as G1 (or G2, G3,<br />
etc.).<br />
Changing a G-group Definition: Select G-groups from the Draw<br />
menu to modify a G-group definition. Select a previously defined G-<br />
group from the list. Click Modify. The G-group Definitions dialog<br />
box is displayed. Select atoms, shortcuts, variables, G-groups, and/or<br />
fragments to modify.<br />
Click each item that you want to deselect and/or click new items to<br />
add to the definition. Click OK to complete the modification. Then<br />
click Save.
Structure Queries 6–23<br />
Defining a New<br />
G-group<br />
Select G-groups from the Draw menu to display a G-group Definitions<br />
dialog box.<br />
Click New. The Define New G-Group dialog box is displayed.<br />
The first G-group defined is labeled G1. Up to 20 G-groups can be<br />
defined and each G-group is numbered consecutively, i.e., G1, G2,<br />
G3,…G20.<br />
Click Atoms, Shortcuts, Variables, G-groups, and/or Fragments to<br />
define the members of the G-group.<br />
Atoms, Shortcuts, Variables (<strong>STN</strong> only): When you click the Atoms,<br />
Shortcuts, or Variables button to use in a G-group, the appropriate dialog<br />
box is displayed. Select nodes to include in your G-group. The selections<br />
are listed next to the G-group name, e.g., G1.<br />
G-groups: When you click G-groups, you may add a previously defined<br />
G-group to a new G-group. To add a G-group, select a G-group from the<br />
G-Groups Definitions dialog box. This is only available if you have<br />
previously defined a G-group.<br />
☞<br />
Questel structures may nest G-groups only 3 levels deeper than the<br />
main drawing level, may use a G-group only once, and require you to<br />
create another identical G-group if you want to use the same one<br />
more than once.
6–24 Structure Queries<br />
Fragments: To include a fragment as a G-group:<br />
1. Draw your primary structure and the fragment(s) you wish to include<br />
in the G-group definition.<br />
2. Define the Points of Attachment for each fragment.<br />
Select G-groups from the Draw menu. Select @ point of<br />
attachment. Click Multiple Use. The @ is displayed in the Current<br />
Atom box.<br />
☞ No more than two points of attachment are permitted on a<br />
fragment.<br />
Select the atoms in your fragment that will be the points of attachment<br />
to your primary structure. An @ will display next to the atoms you<br />
selected.<br />
3. Define a G-group containing a fragment and use it in a structure.<br />
Select G-groups from the Draw menu. Click New to display the<br />
Define New G-Group dialog box. Then click Fragments. The<br />
G-group Fragments dialog box is displayed.
Structure Queries 6–25<br />
To select all fragments that have defined points of attachment,<br />
click Include All Fragments. A ✓ is inserted in the Include This<br />
Fragment check box. Click OK. The G-group definition is<br />
shown in the Define New G-Group dialog box.<br />
☞ You can also pre-select fragments to include in your G-group<br />
definitions by clicking them <strong>with</strong> the Selection tool. Then<br />
click the Include Preselected Fragments button in the G-<br />
group Fragments dialog box to include them.<br />
Click Save to create your G-group and return to the G-Group<br />
Definitions dialog box. Click Single Use or Multiple Use.<br />
You are returned to your structure query. Click the atom you<br />
want to replace <strong>with</strong> the G-group.<br />
4. Click Save from the File menu to save the structure.<br />
If the fragments contain two points of attachment, the G-group<br />
orientation option is active and ✓’ed in the Saving dialog box.<br />
5. G-group Orientation<br />
When two points of attachment exist in a fragment that is part of a<br />
G-group and the G-group orientation is ✓’ed, the Fragment<br />
Orientation dialog box is displayed. Specify the placement of the<br />
fragment relative to the other atoms in the primary structure. You<br />
must perform fragment orientation to create a searchable<br />
structure for <strong>STN</strong> or Questel.<br />
☞ G-group orientation is performed during Fragmentation Code<br />
generation for WPI structures.<br />
In the Fragment Orientation dialog box, click Show Fragment<br />
to show how the fragment’s points of attachment are numbered.<br />
Click Show Structure to see how the G-group is attached <strong>with</strong>in<br />
the structure. The G-group and a connecting atom are<br />
highlighted. Select the fragment’s point of attachment number that<br />
corresponds to the highlighted node in the structure. Click Select<br />
to continue saving the structure.<br />
☞ You must select an orientation for single-atom fragments if<br />
they have two points of attachment.
6–26 Structure Queries<br />
[ ]m-n (Repeating<br />
Groups)<br />
Use the [ ]m-n command to insert a repeating group into your structure<br />
query. To create a repeating group:<br />
1. Draw a structure that will contain the repeating group.<br />
2. Click the Selection tool and select the nodes that are to become<br />
members of a repeating group. Refer to the Selection Tool<br />
section for details on selecting multiple items.<br />
☞ There must be two attachments to the repeating group that are<br />
not part of the repeating group.<br />
3. Select [ ]m-n from the Draw menu to define the selected nodes<br />
as a repeating group. The Repeating Group Range dialog box<br />
is displayed. Type the numerical range for the group to repeat<br />
(0-20 times).<br />
The group is bracketed and subscripted <strong>with</strong> the repeating range<br />
entered.
Structure Queries 6–27<br />
Delete [ ]m-n<br />
Delete [ ]m-n is used to remove a repeating group from a structure. To<br />
delete a group:<br />
1. Click the Selection tool. Select an atom in the repeating group<br />
that you want to delete.<br />
2. Select Delete [ ]m-n from the Draw menu to delete the repeating<br />
group definition. The atoms in the repeating groups are not<br />
deleted. Only the brackets and repeating range are deleted.<br />
Chain Superatoms<br />
Select Chain Superatoms to insert a chain superatom into a WPI<br />
structure query only. When you select this command, the Chain<br />
Superatoms dialog box is displayed.<br />
Click the radio button next to one of the chain superatoms. Then click<br />
Single Use or Multiple Use. Insert the chain superatom at the desired<br />
location in your structure.<br />
Refer to Chapter 8, WPI Fragmentation Codes, for more details.<br />
Ring Superatoms<br />
Select Ring Superatoms to insert a ring superatom into a WPI structure<br />
query only. When you select this command, the Ring Superatoms<br />
dialog box is displayed.<br />
Click the radio button next to one of the ring superatoms. Then click<br />
Single Use or Multiple Use. Insert the ring superatom at the desired<br />
location in your structure.<br />
Refer to Chapter 8, WPI Fragmentation Codes, for more details.<br />
Other Superatoms<br />
Select Other Superatoms to insert a superatom other than a chain or a<br />
ring superatom into a WPI structure query only. When you select this<br />
command, the Other Superatoms dialog box is displayed.<br />
Click the radio button next to one of the “other” superatoms. Then click<br />
Single Use or Multiple Use. Insert the “other” superatom at the desired<br />
location in your structure.<br />
Refer to Chapter 8, WPI Fragmentation Codes, for more details.
6–28 Structure Queries<br />
Square Brackets<br />
Select Square Brackets to insert brackets around a structure or a<br />
structure fragment. This is useful when you want to include the structure<br />
or structure fragment in a word processing application to reference it.<br />
To enclose a structure or structure fragment, select Square Brackets<br />
from the Draw menu. Your cursor changes to resemble two square<br />
brackets. Click and drag the cursor so that the dashed rectangle includes<br />
the structure to be enclosed. A Brackets dialog box is displayed after you<br />
release the mouse button.<br />
Type a number from 1 to 99 in the Text box, i.e., a reference number.<br />
Click the radio button next to Back or Front to place the number after the<br />
right-most bracket or before the left-most bracket. Click OK.<br />
☞ Brackets do not affect search results.<br />
To delete a set of brackets, use the Eraser tool.<br />
Fuse Fragment<br />
Fuse Fragment is used to join two fragments at a node or a bond. To use<br />
this command:<br />
1. Click the Selection tool and select the node or bond in the<br />
fragment that you want to fuse.<br />
2. Select Fuse Fragment from the Draw menu or click the Fuse<br />
Fragment button if it is located on your Structure Drawing<br />
Toolbar. The cursor changes to two facing arrows.<br />
3. Place the cursor at the node or bond of the other fragment that<br />
you are fusing to the first fragment and click. The fragments<br />
become fused together.<br />
☞ Depending on the the positions of the nodes and bonds in the two<br />
fragments, more than one node and bond can be fused.
Structure Queries 6–29<br />
Template!<br />
Menu for<br />
Structure<br />
Drawing<br />
The Template! menu contains a collection of predefined structures to use<br />
when building a structure query. <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! contains a<br />
variety of templates in the Templates directory. You may also draw your<br />
own structures and save them as templates.<br />
To insert a template into your Structure Drawing window, click Template<br />
from the Structure Drawing Main Menu bar. The Open Template dialog<br />
box is displayed and lists the templates by their file names.<br />
Select a template file by clicking a template file name in the scrollable file<br />
name box. The structure is shown in the lower right hand corner of the<br />
dialog box. Then click Open.<br />
☞ Three types of templates are included <strong>with</strong> <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>!. They are the .std (Standard) extension, the .ste (Stereo)<br />
extension, and the .spe (SPECINFO) extension. Standard and stereo<br />
templates are in the \template\standard directory while SPECINFO<br />
templates are stored in the \template\specinfo directory.<br />
The structure for the template you selected is displayed in the Template<br />
dialog box and the Selection tool is activated. Select the entire structure<br />
or a structure fragment and then click OK.<br />
The Template dialog box disappears and you are returned to the Structure<br />
Drawing environment. Click to insert the selected structure.<br />
QueryDef<br />
Menu for<br />
Structure<br />
Drawing<br />
The QueryDef menu is used to define very specific and precise attributes<br />
in your structure query, e.g., an <strong>STN</strong> ring system to be isolated as<br />
opposed to isolated or embedded.<br />
☞ To set an attribute for a structure, click the Selection or Lasso tool.<br />
Select one or more nodes in the fragment to define. Then select a<br />
command from the QueryDef menu. Select the attributes from the<br />
resulting dialog box. Click OK.<br />
Shortcut: To set attribute values on a single atom or bond, right-click on<br />
that object and select the desired attribute from the pulldown menu.
6–30 Structure Queries<br />
Ring Isolation<br />
Ring Isolation is used to select a ring system specification for a selected<br />
ring. First select the entire ring system or any nodes in it. Then select<br />
Ring Isolation from the QueryDef menu. The Ring Isolation dialog box<br />
displays.<br />
☞ Shortcut: right-click on a node and select Ring Isolation.<br />
Click the radio button next to the selection you want. The selections<br />
include:<br />
• Isolated/Embedded: This setting retrieves search results <strong>with</strong> the<br />
selected ring system either isolated or embedded in a larger ring<br />
system. This is the default and will retrieve the most answers.<br />
• Isolated: This setting retrieves only search results that have no<br />
additional ring fusion to the selected ring system. Additional chain<br />
substitution is allowed at nodes in the ring.<br />
• Mixture: Structure Drawing activates this choice to remind you<br />
that you have selected rings or ring systems that have a mixture of<br />
Ring Isolation settings. You may not select this choice yourself.<br />
Click OK.<br />
Bond<br />
Characteristics<br />
Bond Characteristics is used to set a bond type and a bond value for one<br />
or more bonds in a structure query. Select the bonds to be modified.<br />
Select Bond Characteristics from the QueryDef menu. The Bond<br />
Characteristics dialog box is displayed and includes options to set the<br />
Bond Type (ring or chain) and the Bond Value (bond order, e.g., single<br />
or double).<br />
☞ Shortcut: right-click on a bond.<br />
Click the radio button next to the Bond Type and Bond Value that you<br />
want. Click the Bond Types button to select a bond default for single or<br />
multiple use. Then click OK. The bond types and bond values include:<br />
• Bond Types<br />
Chain: Search results include structures containing only the<br />
selected bonds in a chain. This is the default type for drawn<br />
chain bonds. You cannot alter the bond type of bonds drawn in<br />
rings.<br />
Ring/Chain: Search results include structures containing the<br />
selected bonds in either rings or chains. Nodes on either side of<br />
a bond set to ring/chain are set to ring or chain.<br />
Ring: Search results include substances containing the specified<br />
bonds in rings. This is the default type for ring bonds. You may<br />
change a chain bond to a ring bond, but you cannot alter a bond<br />
<strong>with</strong>in a drawn ring. The nodes on either side of the new ring<br />
bond are also set to ring.<br />
Mixture: Structure Drawing activates this choice to remind you<br />
that you have selected bonds that have a mixture of bond types.<br />
You may not select this choice yourself.
Structure Queries 6–31<br />
• Bond Values<br />
Exact/Normalized: Search results match answers either <strong>with</strong> the<br />
exact bond value drawn or <strong>with</strong> normalized bonds in the<br />
corresponding position. Using these bonds ensures maximum<br />
recall <strong>with</strong>out sacrificing precision.<br />
Exact: Search results exactly match the bond value drawn. This<br />
is the default value for carbon-carbon bonds in chains and most<br />
bonds in isolated rings.<br />
Normalized: Search results only match answers <strong>with</strong> corresponding<br />
normalized bonds. This is the default for even-numbered<br />
rings and ring systems <strong>with</strong> alternating single and double bonds<br />
all the way around the cyclic path and for tautomeric bonds.<br />
Unspecified: Search results have any bond value for a bond <strong>with</strong><br />
this value. This is selected when the selected bond has a value of<br />
Unspecified, but is grayed because it is not user-selectable in this<br />
dialog box. Select Bond from the Draw menu to change bonds to<br />
Unspecified.<br />
Mixture: Structure Drawing activates this choice to remind you<br />
that you have selected bonds that have a mixture of bond values.<br />
You may not select this choice yourself.<br />
Click OK.<br />
Node<br />
Characteristics<br />
Node Characteristics is used to set an attribute for one or more nodes in<br />
a structure query. Select the nodes. Then select Node Characteristics<br />
from the QueryDef menu. The Node Characteristics dialog box is<br />
displayed.<br />
☞ Shortcut: right-click on a node and select Node Characteristics.<br />
Click the radio button next to the attribute you want. They include:<br />
• Chain: This setting retrieves search results that include<br />
structures <strong>with</strong> the selected node in a chain. This is the default<br />
for nodes drawn in chains. This characteristic may not be<br />
applied to a node in a ring.<br />
• Ring: This setting retrieves search results that have the selected<br />
node in a ring. This is the default for ring nodes. You may<br />
change a chain node to ring, but you cannot change a ring node<br />
to chain. Changing node characteristics of atoms on both ends<br />
of a bond does NOT change the bond type.<br />
• Ring/Chain: This setting retrieves search results that have the<br />
selected node(s) in either a chain or a ring.<br />
• Mixture: Structure Drawing activates this choice to remind you<br />
that you have selected nodes that have a mixture of node<br />
characteristics. You may not select this choice yourself.<br />
Click OK.<br />
Changing the node characteristics changes all selected nodes<br />
regardless of their previous setting.
6–32 Structure Queries<br />
Hydrogen<br />
Attachments<br />
Hydrogen Attachments is used to specify the number of hydrogens<br />
attached to selected nodes in a structure query. Select the nodes. Select<br />
Hydrogen Attachments from the QueryDef menu. The Hydrogen<br />
Attachments dialog box is displayed.<br />
☞ Shortcut: right-click on a node and select Hydrogen Attachments.<br />
Select the radio button next to the value you want.<br />
• Any: This setting retrieves search results that include structures<br />
<strong>with</strong> any number of hydrogen attachments at the selected node,<br />
including none. This is the default setting for all nodes.<br />
• Specific: This setting allows you to specify the number of<br />
hydrogens allowed to attach to a selected node. You may specify<br />
the exact or minimum number. Type a number from 0 to 99.<br />
Exact: This setting retrieves search results that include only<br />
structures <strong>with</strong> exactly the specified number of hydrogens<br />
attached to the selected node(s).<br />
Minimum: This setting retrieves search results that include<br />
only structures <strong>with</strong> at least the specified number of<br />
hydrogens attached to the selected node. Alternately, you<br />
could draw the hydrogens on the node directly using the<br />
Pencil or Chain tool.<br />
Mixture: Structure Drawing activates this choice to remind<br />
you that you have selected nodes that have a mixture of<br />
hydrogen attachments. You may not select this choice<br />
yourself.<br />
The value for hydrogen attachments must include the count of hydrogen<br />
atoms drawn as attachments to the node. If the value for hydrogen<br />
attachments is less than the count of hydrogens attached to a node, a<br />
warning comes up during Save.<br />
Changing the number of hydrogen attachments changes all selected<br />
nodes regardless of their previous setting.<br />
Click OK.
Structure Queries 6–33<br />
Non-H<br />
Attachments<br />
Non-H Attachments is used to specify the degree of substitution for one or<br />
more selected node(s) in a structure query. Select the nodes. Select<br />
Non-H Attachments from the QueryDef menu. The Non Hydrogen<br />
Attachments dialog box is displayed.<br />
☞ Shortcut: right-click on a node and select Non-H Attachments.<br />
Select the radio button next to an attribute in the Non Hydrogen<br />
Attachments dialog box.<br />
• Any: This setting retrieves search results that include structures<br />
<strong>with</strong> substitution of any number of ring or chain non-hydrogen<br />
connections at the selected node(s). This is the default setting for<br />
all nodes.<br />
• Specific: This setting allows you to specify the number and type<br />
of non-hydrogen connections allowed to attach to a selected<br />
node. You may specify the exact or minimum number. Type a<br />
number from 1 to 16. You may specify that the bond(s) to the<br />
attached node(s) be Chain, Ring, or Ring/Chain.<br />
Click OK.<br />
Exact: This setting retrieves search results that include<br />
structures <strong>with</strong> only the exact number of Non-H connections<br />
for the specified type (chain, ring, or ring/chain) attached to<br />
the selected node(s).<br />
Minimum: This setting retrieves search results that include<br />
structures only <strong>with</strong> at least the specified number for Non-H<br />
connections of the specified type (chain, ring, or ring/chain)<br />
attached to the selected node.<br />
Maximum: This setting retrieves search results that include<br />
structures <strong>with</strong> only no more than the specified number of<br />
non-hydrogen connections of the specified type (chain, ring,<br />
or ring/chain) attached to the selected node(s).<br />
Mixture: Structure Drawing activates this choice to remind<br />
you that you have selected a mixture of non-hydrogen<br />
attachments. You may not select this choice yourself.<br />
Chain: This setting defines that the bond(s) to the attached<br />
node(s) must be chain.<br />
Ring: This setting defines that the bond(s) to the attached<br />
node(s) must be ring.<br />
Ring/Chain: This setting defines that the bond(s) to the<br />
attached node(s) may be ring or a chain.
6–34 Structure Queries<br />
Other Attributes<br />
Other Attributes is used to set a charge, valency, and isotope attributes for<br />
ONE node in a structure. Select the node. Select Other Attributes from<br />
the QueryDef menu. The Other Node Attributes dialog box is displayed.<br />
☞ Shortcut: right-click on a node and select Other Attributes.<br />
Select the appropriate option from the following:<br />
• Charge: The default charge is Any, which retrieves answers <strong>with</strong><br />
both charged and uncharged atoms at the selected node. Other<br />
settings include Any+, Any-, or a specific number in the range<br />
from -30 to +30. Scroll the Charge box to select a numeric<br />
charge.<br />
• Valency: The default valency setting is Any, which retrieves<br />
answers <strong>with</strong> any valency on the selected node. Other settings<br />
include Abnormal or a specific number in the range from 1 to 16.<br />
Valency is equal to the total number of bonds to a node, plus the<br />
absolute value of any charge on the selected node.<br />
• Isotope: The default isotope setting is Any, which retrieves<br />
answers <strong>with</strong> any isotope value, including none, for the selected<br />
node. Other settings include Abnormal or a specific number.<br />
Specified numbers may be in the range from 1 to 255.<br />
Generic Definition<br />
Generic Definition is used to change a default setting for selected generic<br />
nodes, i.e., Ak, Cb, Cy, Hy. Select a generic node in the drawing area.<br />
Then select Generic Definition from the QueryDef menu. The Generic<br />
Definition dialog box is displayed and provides options for Saturation,<br />
Type of Chain, Number of Hetero Atoms, Type of Ring System, and<br />
Number of Carbon Atoms.<br />
☞ Shortcut: right-click on a generic group node.<br />
☞ Only generic definitions applicable to the selected generic node are<br />
active.
Structure Queries 6–35<br />
Click the radio buttons next to the selections you want. Options include:<br />
• Saturation: A generic group is saturated when all of the bonds<br />
between the atoms of the group are single exact bonds. The<br />
generic group is unsaturated when there is at least one double<br />
exact, triple, or normalized bond in the group. The default setting<br />
is Any.<br />
• Type of Chain: A generic group is linear when all of the atoms<br />
<strong>with</strong>in the group have one or two attachments to other atoms in the<br />
group. A generic group is branched when at least one atom<br />
<strong>with</strong>in the group has more than two attachments to other atoms in<br />
the group. The default setting is Any.<br />
• Number of Hetero Atoms: A hetero atom is defined as a noncarbon<br />
atom. Some generic groups may have one or more<br />
hetero atom. The default setting is Any.<br />
• Type of Ring System: A ring is monocyclic when only one bond<br />
must be broken to change the ring to a chain. For polycyclic<br />
rings, two or more bonds must be broken to change the ring<br />
system to a chain. The default setting is Any.<br />
• Number of Carbon Atoms: Selected generic groups may have<br />
fewer than 7 carbon atoms or 7 or more carbon atoms. The<br />
default setting is Any.<br />
Click OK.<br />
Markush Attributes<br />
☞ Markush Attributes affect search results only in the MARPAT and<br />
MARPATPREV Files.<br />
Markush Attributes is used to change the default setting for one or more<br />
selected nodes. Select the nodes. Select Markush Attributes from the<br />
QueryDef menu. The Markush Attributes dialog box is displayed and<br />
provides options for Match Level and Element Count Level.<br />
☞ Shortcut: right-click on a generic group node.<br />
Click the radio buttons next to the selections you want.<br />
The default may be changed, for rings or chains separately, on the<br />
Chemistry tab of your Structure Drawing Preferences.
6–36 Structure Queries<br />
Match Level (MLEVEL) Options<br />
• Class - searches for structure matches at either the generic group or<br />
the atom level. This is the initial default setting for chain nodes.<br />
• Atom - limits the search to structure matches at the atom level. This<br />
is the initial default setting for ring nodes.<br />
• Any - searches for matched structures at any level, including generic<br />
R groups<br />
• Mixed - Structure Drawing activates this choice to remind you that<br />
you have selected nodes that have a mixture of match levels. You<br />
may not select this choice yourself.<br />
Changing the match level changes all selected nodes regardless of their<br />
previous setting.<br />
Element Count Level Options<br />
• Limited - requires an Element Count to be explicitly stated on<br />
matching generic nodes in answers. The box is gray if the nodes you<br />
select have both Limited and Unlimited values.<br />
After selecting your choices for either Match Level or Element Count<br />
Level, click OK.<br />
Element Count<br />
Element Count is used to limit the types and numbers of elements in<br />
generic groups or to limit the types of Markush retrievals for your query.<br />
To use this command, select one or more generic nodes in your structure.<br />
Then select Element Count from the QueryDef menu. The Element<br />
Count dialog box is displayed.<br />
☞ Shortcut: right-click on a generic group node.<br />
Choose the elements that you wish to limit in your query. Select Exact,<br />
Range, Minimum, or Maximum. Click Add to apply the Element Count to<br />
selected nodes. Click Remove to remove the Element Count from<br />
selected nodes. Click OK to return to structure building.<br />
If multiple nodes are selected, only the Limited box is available unless all<br />
of the nodes are generic groups <strong>with</strong> the same element count definitions.<br />
The elements available for selection depend upon the generic group<br />
selected.<br />
Click ✓ in the Limited box to match generic groups that explicitly meet<br />
your Element Count specifications. If the Limited box is not clicked,<br />
generic groups that merely imply your Element Count specification will be<br />
matched.
Structure Queries 6–37<br />
Delocalized<br />
Charge<br />
Delocalized Charge is used to change the default setting for selected<br />
nodes. Select the nodes. Selected nodes MUST be adjacent. Then<br />
select Delocalized Charge from the QueryDef menu.<br />
The Delocalized Charge dialog box is displayed and provides a scrollable<br />
list of delocalized charge values.<br />
Select a delocalized charge from the scrollable list. Options include:<br />
• Any: Retrieves substances <strong>with</strong> or <strong>with</strong>out a delocalized charge.<br />
This is the default.<br />
• Specific Numbers: Select a specific number between 5+ and 5-<br />
or a specific number range to include Any+, i.e., from 1+ to 5+,<br />
or Any-, i.e., from 5- to 1-.<br />
After selecting a delocalized charge value, click OK.<br />
Stereochemistry<br />
Refer to the Stereo Searching section, at the end of this chapter for<br />
details on this command.<br />
Free Sites<br />
☞ The Free Sites command is applicable only when creating WPI and<br />
Questel structures.<br />
Free Sites is used to change the default setting for one or more selected<br />
node. Select the nodes. Select Free Sites from the QueryDef menu.<br />
The Free Sites dialog box is displayed and provides a scrollable list of<br />
free site values.<br />
Select a value from the scrollable list. The default, None, retrieves search<br />
results containing the normal valency of the atom <strong>with</strong> hydrogen<br />
attachments only.<br />
You may also specify a maximum value, between 1 and 9, for nonhydrogen<br />
attachments acceptable to the selected nodes. Bond types are<br />
not considered.<br />
Click OK.
6–38 Structure Queries<br />
Review Functional<br />
Group <strong>STN</strong><br />
Commands<br />
Review Functional Group <strong>STN</strong> Commands allows you to review the <strong>STN</strong><br />
command file that represents a saved Functional Group structure query.<br />
The command file displays the list of search refinement filters that have<br />
been saved for the query.<br />
To use this command, select Review Functional Group <strong>STN</strong> Commands<br />
from the QueryDef menu. The command file is displayed in the stnedit<br />
dialog box.<br />
After you have reviewed the commands, click OK.<br />
For more details about functional groups, refer to Chapter 7, Reaction<br />
Queries.<br />
Query Verification<br />
Query Verification is used to review the attributes of your current structure<br />
query.<br />
To use this command, select Query Verification from the QueryDef<br />
menu. The Query Verification dialog box is displayed.<br />
Click the radio button next to All, the default, to review all attributes.<br />
Or click the radio button adjacent to Select to choose specific attributes to<br />
review. If you choose Select, you may quickly select attributes in a<br />
category by clicking the appropriate button, e.g., Rings. Otherwise, click<br />
a ✓ in each attribute you want to review.<br />
☞ You may also examine each attribute in a structure query by clicking<br />
the Query Attribute button on the Toolbar. Refer to the Toolbar<br />
section earlier in this chapter for more details.<br />
Click OK. <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! displays small dialogs describing<br />
these attributes and their locations in your structure.
Structure Queries 6–39<br />
Display Menu<br />
in Structure<br />
Drawing<br />
Carbons<br />
The Display menu commands affect the appearance or orientation of<br />
your current structure.<br />
Use this option to change the display of individual carbon atoms for the<br />
purpose of documentation or presentation. Search results are not<br />
affected.<br />
First select the carbon atoms that you want to change using the Selection<br />
tool. Then select one of the three display options available from the<br />
Carbons command in the Display menu. The selected carbons are<br />
changed to your specification.<br />
☞ To change the display of all carbon atoms, click the Carbon Atom<br />
Display button on your Toolbar or change the setting in the Drawing<br />
section of your Structure Drawing Preferences.<br />
Stereo<br />
Select Stereo to label selected nodes as d, l, dl, “+”, “-”, “+/-”, R, S, RS,<br />
“.”, “:”, “::”, or RAC. This is for display only and does not affect your<br />
search results.<br />
Stereo labels can be deleted using the Eraser tool and moved using the<br />
Lasso tool.<br />
Show/Hide VPA<br />
(<strong>STN</strong> structures<br />
only)<br />
Show Node<br />
Numbers (N)<br />
Select Show VPA to toggle the display of hidden “bonds” <strong>with</strong> Variable<br />
Points of Attachment.<br />
Select Show Node Numbers to toggle between showing the node<br />
symbols, e.g., O, Me, X, or their node numbers.<br />
Ring Circles<br />
Select Ring Circles to toggle between displaying benzene rings <strong>with</strong> a<br />
circle in the middle or <strong>with</strong> alternating single and double bonds.<br />
Show Reactions<br />
Select Show Reactions to display reaction information such as Reaction<br />
Roles, Reaction Sites, and Reaction Mapping and to activate the reaction<br />
drawing tools.
6–40 Structure Queries<br />
Show Query<br />
Attributes<br />
Select Show Query Attributes to launch the query attribute viewer for<br />
displaying attribute information for a node or bond at the cursor position.<br />
Smooth (Ctrl+E)<br />
Select Smooth to straighten and align structure components, e.g.,<br />
freehand drawn rings.<br />
Sometimes <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! is unable to smooth some<br />
structures and, in these cases, will display an informational message.<br />
Also, structures may be “smoothed” in a way that you do not like. If so,<br />
select Undo from the Edit menu to restore the structure.<br />
Expand (>)<br />
Select Expand to enlarge and center your structure drawing. Use the<br />
scroll bars to view a drawing that is off the screen.<br />
Contract (
Structure Queries 6–41<br />
Flip fragment<br />
vertical (U)<br />
Select Flip fragment vertical to flip a structure up or down.<br />
To flip a fragment, position the cursor on an atom on the horizontal axis<br />
line where the structure will be flipped and click.<br />
Show Grid<br />
Select Show Grid to display a drawing grid in your Structure Drawing<br />
window. The structure is displayed on top of the grid. Refer to the<br />
Drawing section of Structure Drawing Preferences to modify the<br />
default spacing between grid lines.<br />
Snap to Grid<br />
Select Snap to Grid to place selected nodes on the nearest grid position.<br />
Refer to the Drawing section of (Structure Drawing) Preferences to<br />
modify the default spacing between grid positions.<br />
☞ If no nodes are selected, all nodes in the drawing area are snapped to<br />
the grid.<br />
Snap to Compass<br />
Select Snap to Compass to snap selected bonds to the nearest compass<br />
position. Refer to the Drawing section of (Structure Drawing)<br />
Preferences to modify the default spacing between compass intervals.<br />
☞ If no bonds are selected, all bonds in the drawing area are snapped to<br />
the nearest compass angle.
6–42 Structure Queries<br />
Preferences! Menu<br />
in Structure<br />
Drawing<br />
The Preferences! menu is used to customize your Structure Drawing<br />
environment. Click the Preferences! menu to display the Preferences<br />
dialog box.<br />
Six tabs are available to customize structure drawing. They are<br />
Chemistry, Layout, Save Time, Warnings, Colors/Fonts, and Drawing.<br />
Click a tab to modify preferences.<br />
Chemistry<br />
Click the Chemistry tab to modify defaults for chemistry-related attributes<br />
in Structure Drawing.<br />
Click the check box or the radio button to toggle one of the following<br />
options on or off.<br />
• Show VPA - select to display right attachment points associated<br />
<strong>with</strong> VPA (Variable Points of Attachment). Deselect to hide<br />
attachment points associated <strong>with</strong> VPA. This can also be<br />
changed by clicking the Display menu from the Structure<br />
Drawing Main Menu bar.<br />
• Limited - select to set the default for the Markush element count<br />
level. This may also be changed for any given node <strong>with</strong> the<br />
Markush Attributes command or the Element Count command<br />
in the QueryDef menu from the Structure Drawing Main Menu<br />
bar.<br />
• Use Bond Algorithm - allows you to bypass the Structure<br />
Drawing bond algorithm that automatically sets the bond value for<br />
optimal retrievals. This creates all bonds as Exact/Normalized<br />
unless you manually change them. Some queries can be created<br />
only <strong>with</strong> the Bond Algorithm turned off.<br />
• Show Reactions - select to activate reaction drawing mode by<br />
default.
Structure Queries 6–43<br />
• Markush Match Level Defaults - select to set defaults for<br />
Ring Nodes and Chain Nodes when creating Markush<br />
structures. The defaults may be overridden while in Structure<br />
Drawing.<br />
• Methyl Display - choose to display methyl groups as CH3 or<br />
Me<br />
Then click OK. Your changes take effect immediately. Click Cancel<br />
to cancel the changes.<br />
Layout<br />
Click the Layout tab to modify display of the Structure Drawing tool<br />
palette, toolbar, status bar, and tool tips.<br />
Palette<br />
Click a ✓ in the check boxes to customize the display of the (Tool)<br />
Palette. More than one option may be selected. Options include:<br />
• Horizontal - select to display the Palette horizontally, above<br />
the Structure Drawing window<br />
• Visible - select to display the Palette<br />
• Single Line - select to display the Palette in a single line or a<br />
double line<br />
☞ Some Layout changes may not take affect until after <strong>STN</strong><br />
Structure Drawing is restarted.<br />
Toolbar<br />
Click a ✓ in the check boxes to customize the display of the Toolbar.<br />
More than one option may be selected. Options include:<br />
• Horizontal - select to display the Toolbar horizontally, above<br />
the Structure Drawing window<br />
• Visible - select to display the Toolbar<br />
• Single Line - select to display the Toolbar in a single line or a<br />
double line
6–44 Structure Queries<br />
Status Bar<br />
Click a ✓ in the check boxes to customize the display of the Status Bar.<br />
More than one option may be selected. Options include:<br />
• Clock - select to display the current date and time<br />
• Menu Help - select to display help text for all buttons on the Toolbar<br />
and the Tool Palette<br />
• Mol Formula - select to display a saturated molecular formula<br />
• Tool Tips - select to see information about a tool button when the<br />
cursor is positioned on a button<br />
Then click OK to accept all changes. Or click Cancel to cancel the<br />
changes.<br />
Save Time<br />
Click the Save Time tab to customize the features shown in the dialog box<br />
below.<br />
• Autosave (Seconds) - automatically saves a query being drawn<br />
at the time interval specified. Untitled queries are prompted for a<br />
name, followed by the standard Save options. If you choose to<br />
cancel this option, you are prompted again, after the specified<br />
number of seconds, following the next change to the query.<br />
• Initial Save Dialog Box Checkbox states - click a ✓ in the<br />
following check boxes to set the initial value at save time. These<br />
values can be changed at save time, if desired.<br />
• Query Verify - display the Query Verification dialog box when<br />
you save a structure query<br />
• G-group Orientation - prompts you to specify fragment<br />
orientation for G-groups containing fragments <strong>with</strong> two or<br />
more points of attachment<br />
• Refine Using Structure Filters - Select to refine your<br />
structure query using structure filters
Structure Queries 6–45<br />
• Advanced<br />
• Save all Chain Atoms as Ring/Chain - set all chain atoms to<br />
Ring/Chain when saved<br />
• Save all Chain Bonds as Ring/Chain - set all chain bonds to<br />
Ring/Chain when saved<br />
• Save all Terminal Atoms as Ring/Chain - set all terminal<br />
chain atoms to Ring/Chain when saved<br />
• Select Chain Atoms/Nodes to be saved as Ring/Chain -<br />
manually select atoms and/or bonds to be saved as Ring/<br />
Chain<br />
Click OK after setting the options. Click Cancel to cancel the<br />
changes.<br />
Warnings<br />
Click the Warnings tab to disable or enable warning messages in<br />
Structure Drawing.<br />
To disable messages, select them by clicking anywhere on the line that<br />
contains each message. Then click Disable. An X appears to the left of<br />
each disabled message.<br />
☞ To disable all messages quickly, click the Select All button. Then click<br />
Disable.<br />
To re-enable messages, select them by clicking anywhere on the line that<br />
contains the disabled message. Then click Enable.<br />
☞ To re-enable all messages quickly, click the Select All button. Then<br />
click Enable.
6–46 Structure Queries<br />
If you do not see a message of interest, use the scroll bar to find it. Or<br />
type words in the Search For > text box. Then click Search For >. If a<br />
message is found containing the words, it is automatically scrolled to and<br />
highlighted.<br />
Click OK after setting the options. Click Cancel to cancel any changes.<br />
Colors/Fonts<br />
Click the Colors/Fonts tab to customize the colors of Bonds, Atoms,<br />
Selections, Attributes, Text, and Reactions and to customize the fonts<br />
for atom symbols and text.<br />
To change the color of any item, click the appropriate radio button. Then<br />
click one of the 16 color boxes. The change is shown in the sample<br />
structure displayed in the box on the right.<br />
To change the font for both the atom symbols and the text, click a ✓ in the<br />
Text Font=Atom Font box (selected by default). Then click the Atom<br />
Font button. A Font dialog box is displayed. You may change the font<br />
and point sizes.<br />
To change the font for the atom symbols or the text, uncheck the Text<br />
Font=Atom Font box. Then click the appropriate button, i.e., Atom Font,<br />
Text Font. A Font dialog box is displayed. You may change the font and<br />
point sizes.<br />
Click OK after setting the options. Click Cancel to cancel the changes.
Structure Queries 6–47<br />
Drawing<br />
Click the Drawing tab to customize the options that affect structures while<br />
they are being drawn.<br />
You may modify the following:<br />
• Double Bond Width (Pixels) - specify the distance between<br />
double bonds (only takes effect on printing)<br />
• Pen Width (Pixels) - set the thickness of bonds (only takes<br />
effect on printing)<br />
• Grid Spacing (mm) - specify the default distance between<br />
grid lines. The Grid box must be checked for the Grid to be<br />
displayed.<br />
• Compass Interval (deg) - specify the default compass<br />
interval. (Note that compass intervals used should be factors<br />
of 90 degrees, e.g., 15, 30, otherwise bonds cannot be drawn<br />
horizontally and vertically.<br />
• Bond Length (mm) - set a default bond length which is used<br />
for the ring and chain commands and for freehand drawing<br />
when the Snap Bonds option is checked. Snap Bonds must<br />
be checked to set values for Bond Length.<br />
• Browse Delay (secs) - set the time between displays when<br />
browsing structure queries<br />
☞ Depending on your printer, the double bond width and the pen width<br />
values may need adjustments.<br />
You may change the default for display of carbon atoms from Angles to<br />
Dots or C’s (carbon atoms).<br />
☞ This is also available by clicking the<br />
button on the toolbar.
6–48 Structure Queries<br />
Click a ✓ in any of the following items to turn on the feature. These<br />
include:<br />
• Reaction Help (on by default) - display help dialogs when<br />
drawing a reaction structure query<br />
• Grid - turns a grid on that acts as a guide when drawing a<br />
structure. The grid line spacing can be changed using the Grid<br />
Spacing option.<br />
• Ring Circles - draw circles inside normalized rings, replacing the<br />
alternating single and double bonds. Note that refreshing the<br />
screen display is slower when ring circles are displayed.<br />
• Snap Bonds - specify the bond length to use when drawing rings<br />
and chains. Bonds drawn freehand will automatically snap to the<br />
nearest compass interval at the bond length that you specify. If<br />
this option is unchecked the standard bond length built into the<br />
program is used for drawing rings and chains. Bonds drawn in<br />
freehand are placed at the length and orientation indicated by the<br />
cursor position.<br />
• Delete Atoms <strong>with</strong> Bonds - specify that the nodes at either end<br />
of a bond are deleted when a bond is deleted<br />
Click OK after making changes to the Drawing Preferences. Changes<br />
take effect immediately. Or click Cancel to cancel the changes.<br />
Building and<br />
Searching a<br />
Structure<br />
Query on <strong>STN</strong><br />
Follow the steps below to build and search the following structure query.<br />
1. Select Prepare Structure Query from the Query menu or click the<br />
Prepare Query button on your <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Toolbar.<br />
A new Structure Drawing window is displayed.<br />
2. Build your structure using the Structure Drawing tools and menus.<br />
a. Click the Ring tool and click the six-membered hexagonal ring <strong>with</strong><br />
alternating bonds shortcut. Click in the center of your window to<br />
place the ring.
Structure Queries 6–49<br />
b. Click the Chain tool and type a 2 in the Chain Length box and<br />
click OK to draw a 2-length chain. Place the cursor on the lower<br />
right node of the ring and click.<br />
Draw a 6-Membered Normalized Ring<br />
<strong>with</strong> 2-Atom Chain Attached<br />
c. Click the Chain tool again. Accept the default chain length of 1 to<br />
draw a 1-length chain. Click on the upper right node of the ring to<br />
draw the chain.<br />
d. Click the double bond icon on the Atoms & Bonds Toolbar to<br />
select a double bond value for single use. The cursor changes to<br />
the Pencil tool. Place the Pencil tip on the atom to which you want<br />
to attach another atom by a double bond. Press the left mouse<br />
button and hold while dragging the Pencil straight down. Release<br />
the mouse button to draw a double bond to a single carbon atom.<br />
Attach an Atom <strong>with</strong> a Single Bond (Chain Tool)<br />
and another Atom <strong>with</strong> a Double Bond (Pencil Tool)<br />
e. Double click the N icon (nitrogen atom) on the Atoms & Bonds<br />
Toolbar to select nitrogen for multiple use. Place it on the top<br />
carbon in the ring and click to replace the carbon <strong>with</strong> a nitrogen.<br />
Repeat the process for the bottom carbon in the ring.<br />
f. Single click the O icon (oxygen atom) on the Atoms & Bonds<br />
Toolbar to select oxygen for single use. Using the Pencil tool, click<br />
to place it on the bottom node of the double-bonded chain.<br />
Add Nitrogen and Oxygen Nodes
6–50 Structure Queries<br />
g. Select Shortcut from the Draw menu. Select OH and click Single<br />
Use. Position the Pencil cursor on the right most node in the<br />
structure and click to replace the carbon <strong>with</strong> an OH.<br />
h. Select Variables from the Draw menu and select “X” Halogens.<br />
Click Single Use. Position the Pencil cursor on the top, right-most<br />
node and click to replace the carbon <strong>with</strong> the halogen variable (X).<br />
This completes your structure drawing.<br />
Add OH and Halogen Variable (X) Nodes<br />
3. Select Save from the File menu. Type a name, e.g., halopyra, and<br />
click Save. Select Verify Query from the Save dialog box. Click<br />
Save.<br />
Click OK if each attribute is correct. When the query verification<br />
completes, you are ready to upload your structure to an online<br />
system.<br />
4. Select Exit from the Structure Drawing File menu to return to the Main<br />
Menu bar<br />
5. Click the Logon menu to connect to <strong>STN</strong>, via a logon setup. (Refer to<br />
Chapter 4, Setup, if you have not defined your setup.)<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! opens the <strong>STN</strong> Terminal Emulation<br />
window and automatically connects to <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
Type FILE REGISTRY at the arrow prompt (=>) and press Return.<br />
6. Click Upload Structure Query from the Query menu. Click your<br />
structure file to upload, e.g., halopyra.str, and click Open.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! uploads your structure.<br />
7. Type DIS QUE (DISPLAY QUERY) and press Return to see the<br />
uploaded structure diagram.
Structure Queries 6–51<br />
8. Type SEARCH L1 and press Return. Type the defaults at the search<br />
type and search scope prompts.<br />
When the sample search completes, the number of records found is<br />
displayed, as well as the full file search projections.<br />
Conduct a Substructure Sample Search (SSS)<br />
9. Type D (DISPLAY) at the arrow prompt and press Return. The first<br />
answer from your sample search is displayed.<br />
Display First Answer of Sample Search<br />
You can also type D SCAN to display answers in random order. D<br />
SCAN is a no charge feature that allows you to review answers to<br />
confirm that you have the expected results from the query.
6–52 Structure Queries<br />
10. Select Logoff or Logoff Hold from the Online menu. Logoff Hold<br />
saves your session for 60 minutes <strong>with</strong> no charge for the hold time.<br />
Creating<br />
Stereospecific<br />
Structures<br />
Select Prepare Structure Query from the Query menu or click the<br />
Prepare Query button if it is located on the Main Menu Toolbar. Open a<br />
new or existing file and build and save the structure below.<br />
Structure Example<br />
Convert the structure into a chiral structure <strong>with</strong> the following steps:<br />
1. Select Bond from the Draw menu. Select Stereo from plane. Click<br />
Multiple Use to draw more than one Stereo from plane bond.<br />
2. Click the Pencil tool. Click on the bonds that connect the substituents<br />
to the ring to make them Stereo.<br />
Stereo Structure Example<br />
☞ To confirm that the structure is now a stereo structure, select<br />
Query Verification from the QueryDef menu.<br />
☞ To change the orientation, select the node <strong>with</strong> the Selection tool.<br />
Select Stereochemistry from the QueryDef menu. Click Invert<br />
from the Node Attribute list. Click OK.
Structure Queries 6–53<br />
Stereochemistry<br />
in QueryDef menu<br />
Select Stereochemistry from the QueryDef menu to customize your<br />
stereospecific structure. The Stereochemistry dialog box is displayed.<br />
The Stereochemistry command is most commonly used to specify either<br />
Absolute or Relative stereochemistry. The default is Relative.<br />
Relative searches are broader than Absolute searches because relative<br />
stereochemistry allows retrieval of both possible enantiomers. When<br />
performing a relative Stereo Search, your answers may be either absolute<br />
or relative. The answer record for each substance states whether the<br />
substance’s stereochemistry is relative or absolute.<br />
An Absolute Stereo Search limits your answers to the single enantiomer<br />
that you have drawn in your query. Absolute structure searches reduce<br />
the number of retrieved records because your search is more precise.<br />
Also, you may want to set the stereochemistry to Absolute for any query<br />
<strong>with</strong> a single chiral center.
6–54 Structure Queries<br />
To search for structures <strong>with</strong> double bond geometry, draw the double<br />
bonds <strong>with</strong> the geometry that you want. Then indicate that the double<br />
bond should be searched <strong>with</strong> stereochemistry by following these steps:<br />
1. Select the bonds<br />
2. Select Stereochemistry from the Query menu<br />
3. Select Stereo under Geometric Bonds in the Stereochemistry<br />
dialog box<br />
To further customize structures stereospecifically, select from the following<br />
options in the Stereochemistry menu.<br />
• Stereo Set options are used to define different stereo groups<br />
<strong>with</strong>in a single structure, e.g., to make the relative stereo of the<br />
attachments to one ring independent of the relative stereo of the<br />
attachments to another ring. Stereo Sets are typically needed for<br />
very complex queries. Please consult the <strong>STN</strong> Help Desk before<br />
using Stereo Sets.<br />
• Node Attribute options are used to alter stereo structures, e.g.,<br />
flatten, invert.<br />
To use any of these options, select the stereo nodes in your structure<br />
using the Selection tool. Select Stereochemistry from the QueryDef<br />
menu. Select your options and click OK.<br />
A Few Hints<br />
1. The first item drawn in your stereospecific structure is assumed to<br />
be the stereo center. This determines the direction of all the<br />
stereo bonds in the structure.<br />
2. You cannot distinguish whether a stereo query has Relative or<br />
Absolute stereochemistry by its structure diagram. Queries may<br />
be checked in <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! by selecting<br />
Stereochemistry from the QueryDef menu and checking the<br />
default setting. The text for an answer’s display record will<br />
indicate whether the stereochemistry is Absolute or Relative.<br />
3. When creating double stereo bonds and stereo centers, <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! automatically checks the bond angles, the<br />
attachments, the angles of attachments, and the patterns of stereo<br />
bonds to ensure that the stereo center is valid. Chiral centers<br />
must unambiguously represent a tetrahedron. If any ambiguity<br />
exists, an error message is issued.<br />
4. The small end of a wedge stereo bond must be drawn next to the<br />
chiral center. To change the direction of a stereo bond, click the<br />
right mouse button while on that bond.
Structure Queries 6–55<br />
Stereo<br />
Structure<br />
Building<br />
Features<br />
The features available in stereo query building are listed in the table below.<br />
Stereo Query Building<br />
Function<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! Actions<br />
Change existing bonds to<br />
stereo bonds<br />
Select Bond from Draw menu or click Current Bond<br />
Box to display Bond Selection dialog box.<br />
Select a stereo bond.<br />
Create a wedge or dash<br />
stereo bond<br />
Select Bond from Draw menu or click Current Bond<br />
box to display Bond Selection dialog box.<br />
Select a wedge or dash stereo bond.<br />
Delete stereo aspects of a<br />
stereo bond<br />
Select Bond from Draw menu or click Current Bond<br />
box to display Bond Selection dialog box.<br />
Select a new bond value.
6–56 Structure Queries<br />
Stereo Query Building<br />
Function<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! Actions<br />
“Flatten” a stereo bond<br />
Select Stereo Mode and choose Stereochemistry<br />
from QueryDef menu.<br />
Click flatten.<br />
Set the stereo default<br />
Select bond<br />
Select Stereochemistry from QueryDef menu.<br />
Select the default option.<br />
Reverse stereo bond<br />
Place cursor on stereo bond.<br />
Click right mouse button on bond.<br />
Invert a stereo bond<br />
Select Bond from Draw menu or click Current Bond<br />
box.<br />
Select a different stereo bond.<br />
Invert stereo bonds from a<br />
chiral center<br />
Select stereo node<br />
Select Stereochemistry from QueryDef menu.<br />
Select Invert option.<br />
Make double bond<br />
geometric<br />
Select double bond in structure<br />
Select Stereochemistry from QueryDef menu.<br />
Select choice from Geometric Bonds option.
Structure Queries 6–57<br />
Stereo Query Building<br />
Function<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! Actions<br />
Create a Stereo Set<br />
Select nodes in structure.<br />
Select Stereochemistry from QueryDef menu.<br />
Select option from Stereo Set list.<br />
Add a node to a Stereo Set<br />
Redefine Stereo Set.<br />
Delete a node from a<br />
Stereo Set<br />
Select a node.<br />
Select Stereochemistry from QueryDef menu.<br />
Select Node Attribute, flatten, or Stereo Set, none.<br />
Change the Stereo Set<br />
type<br />
Select all nodes in set. Select Stereochemistry from<br />
QueryDef menu.<br />
Choose a Stereo Set option.<br />
Invert stereo in all chiral<br />
centers<br />
Click Select All in Stereochemistry from QueryDef<br />
menu.<br />
Click Invert .<br />
Put all chiral centers into<br />
Stereo Sets<br />
Click Select All and a Stereo Set choice.
6–58 Structure Queries<br />
Stereo Query Building<br />
Function<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! Actions<br />
Delete Stereo at a chiral<br />
center<br />
Select the node.<br />
Select Stereochemistry.<br />
Select Flatten under Node Attributes.<br />
Delete stereo aspects of a<br />
geometric bond<br />
Select bond in structure.<br />
Select Stereochemistry from QueryDef menu.<br />
Click No Stereo from Geometric Bonds list.<br />
Delete a specific Stereo<br />
Set<br />
Select all nodes in the set.<br />
Click None from Stereo Set list in Stereochemistry<br />
from QueryDef menu.<br />
Delete all stereo<br />
specifications<br />
Select Stereochemistry from QueryDef menu.<br />
Click Select All, Flatten from Node list, and/or None<br />
from Geometric Bonds list.<br />
Delete all Stereo Sets<br />
Click Delete Sets in Stereochemistry from QueryDef<br />
menu.<br />
Delete all geometric<br />
specifications<br />
Select Stereochemistry from QueryDef menu.<br />
Click Select All and No Stereo from Geometric<br />
Bonds list.
Structure Queries 6–59<br />
Stereo Query Building<br />
Function<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! Actions<br />
Delete all chiral<br />
specifications<br />
Select Stereochemistry from QueryDef menu.<br />
Click Select All and Flatten from Node list.<br />
Check for common errors<br />
Select Query Verification from QueryDef menu.<br />
Select items to verify.<br />
Click OK.<br />
Display Stereo Attributes<br />
and Stereo Sets<br />
Select Query Verification from QueryDef menu.<br />
Select items to verify.<br />
Click OK.
6–60 Structure Queries<br />
Keyboard<br />
Shortcuts in<br />
Structure<br />
Drawing<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! supports many of the standard Windows<br />
keyboard shortcuts. These shortcuts are listed along <strong>with</strong> menu<br />
commands.<br />
The following shortcuts are available in Structure Drawing and are not<br />
shown in the menu<br />
selections.<br />
Shortcut<br />
Function<br />
Backspace (Shift+Del)<br />
A<br />
C<br />
Edit Clear<br />
Preview Match Level (toggle)<br />
Chain Tool<br />
[ Repeating Groups (Draw menu)<br />
D<br />
L<br />
M<br />
N<br />
P<br />
R<br />
T<br />
U<br />
V<br />
Erase<br />
Flip Fragment Horizontal<br />
Center structure<br />
Show Node Numbers (toggle)<br />
Repaint<br />
Ring Tool<br />
Text input mode<br />
Flip Fragment Vertical<br />
Valency of node at cursor<br />
+ Positive charge dialog for node at cursor
Structure Queries 6–61<br />
Shortcut<br />
Function<br />
- Negative charge dialog for node at cursor<br />
> Scale up (Expand)<br />
< Scale down (Contract)<br />
Ctrl+G<br />
Ctrl+E<br />
Right click on bond<br />
Space Bar<br />
Right click in Current Atom<br />
Box<br />
Right click atom or bond<br />
Right click common atom or<br />
bond<br />
Right click Ring, or Chain<br />
Tool<br />
Right click in drawing area<br />
<strong>with</strong> Ring or Chain Tool<br />
Left click on Toolbar or a<br />
Palette gap<br />
Right click on Toolbar<br />
Right click Reaction Arrow<br />
Right click Text Tool<br />
G-Groups<br />
Smooth<br />
Stereo Bond reversal (in Pencil mode)<br />
Reset to C and Single Bond (defaults)<br />
Display the Atom Selection box<br />
Direct access to attributes<br />
Change value of common atom or bond<br />
Select the tool and set the default size<br />
Insert alternating single and double bonds<br />
Change the layout of the Toolbar or Palette<br />
Edit the Toolbar<br />
Select the tool and the default reaction arrows<br />
Display font selection dialog
6–62 Structure Queries<br />
Creating<br />
Structure<br />
Queries from<br />
Structures in<br />
Transcripts<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> makes it very easy to transform transcript structures into<br />
searchable structure queries. Just follow these steps.<br />
1. Select Browse transcript. Open the transcript containing the<br />
captured structures that you want to change to searchable structure<br />
queries.<br />
2. Highlight the structure diagram in the open transcript. Select Create<br />
Query File from the Edit menu.<br />
3. The Create Query File message is displayed. Click OK.
Structure Queries 6–63<br />
4. In the Structure Queries dialog box, type the name that you want to<br />
assign to the structure.
6–64 Structure Queries<br />
5. To recall the saved structure, select Prepare Structure Query, select<br />
File menu, and Open the saved structure.
Reaction Queries 7–1<br />
7<br />
Reaction Queries<br />
The Structure Drawing environment contains reaction and functional group<br />
drawing tools that enable you to draw reaction queries. Reaction queries<br />
may include:<br />
• Structures and roles for the participants<br />
• A reaction arrow to define the reaction<br />
• Reaction sites to define the bonds where the reaction takes place<br />
• Mapping to show the correspondence of atoms in the reactant to<br />
the atoms in the product<br />
Reactants, reagents, and products are structure searchable in <strong>STN</strong><br />
reaction files. Catalysts and solvents are not structure searchable.<br />
To draw a reaction query, you must first open the Structure Drawing<br />
window by clicking on the Prepare Query button on the main toolbar or<br />
selecting Prepare Structure Query from the Query menu. Click the<br />
Reaction button located on the Toolbar or select Show Reactions from<br />
the Display menu. The Structure Drawing window is displayed in<br />
Reaction mode and the Reaction Drawing tools are activated.<br />
☞ To use Functional Groups, you must click the Functional Group<br />
button. This activates the Functional Group and Reaction structure<br />
drawing mode drawing tools.<br />
Rxn Tool Button<br />
Functional Group Button<br />
Reaction Drawing Tools<br />
Functional Group Tools
7–2 Reaction Queries<br />
Use the Reaction Drawing tools to create your reaction query.<br />
☞ All Structure Drawing tools that are active are available to draw a<br />
reaction query.<br />
Reaction<br />
Arrow<br />
Tool<br />
Click the Reaction Arrow tool from the Tool Palette to set up a chemical<br />
reaction between structures. A Reaction Arrow dialog box is displayed.<br />
The first arrow displayed is the default. Click OK to accept the default, or<br />
select another reaction arrow and click OK.<br />
To draw an arrow, press the mouse button and drag the arrow between the<br />
two points where you want the arrow to appear. Release the mouse<br />
button. You may continue to draw arrows of the same type. To change<br />
arrow types, click the Reaction Arrow tool again.<br />
☞ Reaction arrows are not searched. However, if a participant is<br />
assigned ANY ROLE at the time you draw an arrow, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! reassigns the role as PRODUCT or REACTANT/REAGENT<br />
based on the direction of the arrow and the proximity of a participant<br />
to the arrow’s end.<br />
Reaction<br />
Role<br />
Tool<br />
The Reaction Role tool is used to specify the roles of the participants in a<br />
reaction.<br />
To use this tool, click the Reaction Role tool from the Tool Palette. <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! displays a message telling you to select a node in<br />
a structure fragment. Click OK.<br />
☞ This message is displayed by default. To deactivate all Reaction<br />
Drawing help messages, access Preferences in Structure Drawing.<br />
Then click the Drawing tab and uncheck Reaction Help.
Reaction Queries 7–3<br />
Click a node in the structure fragment whose role you want to define. The<br />
Role Specification Selection dialog box is displayed.<br />
Select a role. Click OK.<br />
The role is displayed under the fragment you selected.<br />
You may continue to specify roles for reaction participants by clicking a<br />
fragment node, and selecting a role.<br />
Reaction<br />
Site<br />
Tool<br />
The Reaction Site tool is used to specify a reaction site label for a specific<br />
bond. Labels include:<br />
CC - completely changed bond, i.e., the selected bond is either<br />
formed or broken<br />
PC - partially changed bond, e.g., an exact bond becomes<br />
normalized<br />
XC - either completely or partially changed bond<br />
NC - the bond is unchanged<br />
NON - no reaction site specification is declared<br />
To use this tool, click the Reaction Site tool from the Tool Palette. <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! displays a message telling you to select a bond in<br />
a structure. Click OK.<br />
☞ This message is displayed by default. To deactivate all Reaction<br />
Drawing help messages, access Preferences in Structure Drawing.<br />
Then click the Drawing tab and uncheck Reaction Help.<br />
The cursor changes to resemble a spider. Click a bond in the structure<br />
fragment you want to define as a reaction site. The Site Specification<br />
Selection dialog box is displayed.
7–4 Reaction Queries<br />
Select one of the options. Click OK.<br />
All reaction sites are marked <strong>with</strong> the Reaction Site tool cursor symbol on<br />
the bond.<br />
☞ If you select the NON site specification, the cursor symbol is removed<br />
from the bond.<br />
Atom<br />
Mapping<br />
Tool<br />
The Atom Mapping tool is used to specify a correspondence between<br />
atoms in the reactant and atoms in the product.<br />
To use this tool, click the Atom Mapping tool from the Tool Palette. A<br />
dialog box is displayed.<br />
Select either the Manual Mapping or the Automatic Mapping option. The<br />
default is Manual Mapping. Click OK.<br />
If you select Manual Mapping, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! displays a<br />
message telling you how to use the Manual Mapping. Click OK.<br />
☞ This message is displayed by default. To deactivate all Reaction<br />
Drawing help messages, access Preferences in Structure Drawing.<br />
Then click the Drawing tab and uncheck Reaction Help.<br />
To indicate a mapping, press and hold the Shift key and click on an atom<br />
in a structure fragment and then on an atom in another fragment. The<br />
selected atoms are numbered identically.<br />
Continue mapping pairs by clicking on the corresponding atoms. Pairs<br />
are numbered sequentially in the order you map them.<br />
☞ The elements at both nodes must be the same. Maps may not be<br />
assigned to shortcut symbols, Gk nodes, or generic groups.<br />
Select one of the options. Click OK.
Reaction Queries 7–5<br />
Building and<br />
Searching a<br />
Reaction<br />
Query<br />
Follow the steps below to build and search a reaction query.<br />
1. Select Prepare Structure Query from the Query menu or click the<br />
Prepare Query button from the Toolbar.<br />
2. Click the RXN button located on the Toolbar.<br />
3. Build the structure shown below using the Structure Drawing tools and<br />
menus described in Chapter 6, Structure Queries.<br />
☞ “Any Role” is assigned to all structures in a reaction query<br />
until you assign them <strong>with</strong> the Reaction Arrow tool or the<br />
Reaction Role tool.<br />
4. Click the Reaction Arrow tool from the Tool Palette. Accept the<br />
default arrow from the Reaction Arrow dialog box and click OK.<br />
5. Draw an arrow from the first structure to the second.<br />
6. The reactions are assigned roles of Reactant/Reagent and Product,<br />
respectively.<br />
7. Click the Reaction Role tool from the Tool Palette. Click on a node<br />
in the first structure. The Role Specification Selection dialog box is<br />
displayed.<br />
8. Select Reactant and click OK.
7–6 Reaction Queries<br />
9. Select Save from the File menu or click the Save button if it is located<br />
on your Toolbar. Type a name, e.g., reactque.str, and click Save.<br />
10. Query Verification and Verify Reaction Specifications are<br />
performed to make sure that the query attributes are set to what you<br />
intended and to ensure all reaction specifications are correct.<br />
11. Select Exit from the File menu.<br />
12. Click the Logon menu or click the Logon button from the Toolbar.<br />
Select a logon setup. (If you have not yet defined a setup, refer to<br />
Chapter 4, Setup.)<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! starts your online session, automatically,<br />
and opens a Terminal Emulation window.<br />
13. Type FILE CASREACT, or another reaction file, at an arrow prompt<br />
(=>) and press Return.<br />
14. Select Upload Structure Query from the Query menu or click the<br />
Upload Query button from the Toolbar. Double-click the structure to<br />
upload, reactque.str.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! displays a dialog box that asks you which<br />
file you intend to search.<br />
Select Reaction-searchable file to execute the search in CASREACT<br />
and to assign a single L-number to the reaction. If you select the<br />
other options, each structure in the reaction is assigned a separate<br />
L-number.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! uploads your reaction query, displays a<br />
dialog box <strong>with</strong> the status of the upload, and displays the following<br />
message: Uploading reactque.str.<br />
15. Type D QUERY and press Return to see the uploaded reaction<br />
query.<br />
16. Type SEARCH L1 RANGE=1996 (RANGE is an <strong>STN</strong> option) and<br />
press Return. Enter the default at the search type prompt.<br />
17. Type D (DISPLAY) and press Return.<br />
The default display format, the first hit reaction, and the compressed<br />
bibliography for the first answer from your range search are<br />
displayed.
Reaction Queries 7–7<br />
Structure attributes must be viewed using <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> query preparation.<br />
=> SEARCH L1 RANGE=1996<br />
ENTER TYPE OF SEARCH (SSS) OR CSS: SSS<br />
RANGE SEARCH INITAITED 12:04:23<br />
SCREENING<br />
SCREENING<br />
SCREENING<br />
SCREENING COMPLETE - 16517 REACTIONS TO VERIFY FROM 1895 DOCUMENTS<br />
25.9% DONE 4277 VERIFIED 2 HIT RXNS 2 DOCS<br />
42.7% DONE 7055 VERIFIED 11 HIT RXNS 8 DOCS<br />
52.2% DONE 8626 VERIFIED 13 HIT RXNS 10 DOCS<br />
71.6% DONE 11819 VERIFIED 22 HIT RXNS 15 DOCS<br />
84.3% DONE 13929 VERIFIED 24 HIT RXNS 16 DOCS<br />
100.0% DONE 16517 VERIFIED 26 HIT RXNS 18 DOCS<br />
SEARCH TIME: 00.02.33<br />
L2<br />
18 SEA RAN=(1996) SSS L1<br />
( 25 REACTIONS)<br />
Select Logoff from the Online menu or click the Logoff button from the<br />
Toolbar.
7–8 Reaction Queries<br />
Using<br />
Functional<br />
Groups<br />
To use Functional Groups in a Reaction Query, you must open a new<br />
window by selecting New/Standard from the Structure Drawing File<br />
menu or clicking the New/Standard button located on the Toolbar.<br />
After opening a new Structure Drawing window, click the Functional<br />
Group button on the Toolbar. The reaction and the functional group<br />
drawing tools, located at the bottom of the Tool Palette, are activated.<br />
☞ The Ring and Chain tools become inactive in the Functional Group<br />
mode.<br />
Selecting a<br />
Functional Group<br />
To select a functional group, either:<br />
1. Right- or left-click in the Current Atom box<br />
The Functional Group Selection dialog box is displayed.<br />
Scroll the list to select the Functional Group you want to insert.<br />
Then click Multiple Use to insert it more than one time and retain<br />
it as your default. Or click Single Use to insert it one time. The<br />
functional group you select is placed in the Current Atom box.<br />
2. Click the Functional Group button on the Tool Palette to select a<br />
functional group from a predefined list.
Reaction Queries 7–9<br />
Select a Functional Group from any scrollable list. The functional<br />
group you select is placed in the Current Atom box.<br />
☞ Functional Groups selected in this manner can only be placed once.<br />
If you want to select a functional group for multiple use, you must<br />
right- or left-click in the Current Atom box. See the previous step for<br />
details.<br />
Placing Functional<br />
Groups<br />
To place a functional group, click the Pencil tool. Then position the Pencil<br />
tool cursor where you want the functional group and click.<br />
Continue selecting and placing functional groups until your query is<br />
complete.<br />
☞ To see the attributes of a functional group right-click on a functional<br />
group. Its attributes are displayed in a Functional Group dialog box.<br />
Completing a<br />
Functional Group<br />
Reaction Query<br />
To complete the query, click the Reaction Arrow tool from the Tool<br />
Palette. Select an arrow from the Reaction Arrow dialog box. Refer to<br />
the Reaction Arrow Tool section for more details.<br />
Then click the Reaction Role tool to specify the roles of the participants in<br />
the functional group query. <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! displays a<br />
message telling you to select a node in the appropriate fragment. Click<br />
OK.<br />
☞ This message is displayed by default. To deactivate all Reaction<br />
Drawing help messages, access Preferences in Structure Drawing.<br />
Then click the Drawing tab and uncheck Reaction Help.
7–10 Reaction Queries<br />
The cursor changes to resemble an arrow. Click a functional group. The<br />
Functional Group Role Selection dialog box is displayed.<br />
Click the radio button next the role you want for the selected functional<br />
group. Then click OK.<br />
☞ Functional Group searching provides additional role values that are<br />
not available for regular reaction searching.<br />
Continue assigning roles to the remaining functional groups in the same<br />
manner.<br />
To see the structure of a functional group, right-click on the functional<br />
group name in the Structure Drawing window. The Functional Group<br />
dialog box is displayed.<br />
The name and the structure of the functional group you clicked is<br />
displayed. Click OK to close this box and return to the Structure Drawing<br />
window.
Reaction Queries 7–11<br />
Combining<br />
Functional Groups<br />
for Searching<br />
To combine functional groups <strong>with</strong> the OR Boolean operator <strong>with</strong>in a<br />
reaction query, click the OR tool from the Tool Palette.<br />
Position the cursor close to the functional groups that you want combined.<br />
Press your mouse button and drag until a box encloses those functional<br />
groups. Then release your mouse button.<br />
The functional groups are enclosed in brackets and are OR’d together in<br />
the reaction query.<br />
When you save a functional group reaction query, an <strong>STN</strong> Command File<br />
is also created. Select Review Functional Group <strong>STN</strong> Commands from<br />
the QueryDef menu or click the Review FG button from the Toolbar to<br />
display the stnedit dialog box.<br />
This identifies the command file that will be used when searching the<br />
CASREACT File on <strong>STN</strong>.
7–12 Reaction Queries<br />
Saving a<br />
Functional Group<br />
Reaction Query<br />
Save the functional group reaction query by clicking Save from the File<br />
menu or by clicking the Save button if it is located on the Toolbar. Type a<br />
file name, e.g., fg2, and click Save.<br />
Verify Reaction Specifications is performed to ensure all reaction<br />
specifications are correct.<br />
Searching a<br />
Functional Group<br />
Query<br />
1. Click the Logon menu or click the Logon button from the Toolbar.<br />
Select a logon setup. (If you have not yet defined a setup, refer to<br />
Chapter 4, Setup.)<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! automatically starts your online session<br />
<strong>with</strong>in a Terminal Emulation window.<br />
2. Type FILE CASREACT, or another reaction file, at an arrow prompt<br />
(=>) and press Return.<br />
3. Select Upload Structure Query from the Query menu. Double-click<br />
the structure to upload, fg2.str.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! then uploads the <strong>STN</strong> FG command file.<br />
4. Type SEARCH L1 and press Return.<br />
5. Type D (DISPLAY) and press Return.<br />
=> S L1<br />
L2<br />
2110 NITRO/FG.FORM<br />
22351 PRIMARY AMINE/FG.RCT<br />
18565 SECONDARY AMINE/FG.RCT<br />
554 NITRO/FG.FORM (L) (PRIMARY AMINE/FG.RCT<br />
OR SECONDARY/FG.RCT<br />
=> D<br />
L2 ANSWER 1 OF 554 CASREACT COPYRIGHT 1996 ACS<br />
6. Select Logoff from the Online menu.
8<br />
WPI Fragmentation Codes 8–1<br />
WPI Fragmentation Codes<br />
The procedures for drawing structures and generating a Fragmentation<br />
Code strategy are described. Fragmentation Codes are generated from<br />
WPI (World Patents Index) structures for searching in the WPIDS<br />
(Derwent subscribers) and the LWPI (the WPI learning file) files on <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
If you frequently use the WPI features in <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
refer to Chapter 3, Main Menu & Toolbar, and to Chapter 6, Structure<br />
Queries, for details about modifying the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Toolbar and the<br />
Structure Drawing Toolbar to contain WPI-specific buttons.<br />
Creating<br />
a WPIDS<br />
or LWPI<br />
Structure<br />
Query<br />
To draw a WPI structure, open Structure Drawing. Click Prepare<br />
Structure Query from the Query menu or click the Prepare Query<br />
button on your Toolbar.<br />
Select New/WPI from the File menu or click the Open WPI button, if it is<br />
located on your Toolbar, to open a new WPI structure drawing window.<br />
An Untitled *WPI* window is displayed.<br />
☞ You may also open an existing WPI structure by selecting Open from<br />
the File menu or clicking an Open button on the Toolbar. Then<br />
choose a structure file. The structure is previewed. If the structure is<br />
in a format other than WPI, click the WPI radio button from the<br />
Convert to list and click Open.<br />
Use the structure drawing tools and menus to create your structure query.<br />
Refer to Chapter 6, Structure Queries, for information about these tools.<br />
WPI Structure<br />
Drawing<br />
Conventions<br />
The following section lists the structure conventions that can be applied to<br />
WPI structure drawings. Some conventions differ from those applied in<br />
structures drawn for other structure-searchable files, e.g., normalized/<br />
aromatic bonds are not used in WPI structures.<br />
For most structures, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! automatically detects<br />
groups that could have more than one possible representation, e.g.,<br />
tautomeric systems, and generates the correct code.<br />
Normalization<br />
Aromatic rings, such as benzene, should be drawn <strong>with</strong> single and double<br />
bonds. Normalized bonds are not used when drawing WPI structures.
8–2 WPI Fragmentation Codes<br />
Tautomeric<br />
Structures<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! automatically generates the correct<br />
fragmentation codes for tautomeric structures, e.g., keto-enols. If your<br />
structure contains a free site, the substitution at this site may result in a<br />
tautomeric structure. When you generate the strategy, this option is<br />
displayed in the Select Fragments dialog box. Refer to the Generating<br />
the Strategy section later in this chapter.<br />
The L9 negation code is generated only for quinones and other<br />
unambiguous cases.<br />
Salts<br />
Inorganic Anion + Inorganic Cation<br />
Draw these structures as separate ions or <strong>with</strong> single bonds, e.g.,<br />
Na + Cl - or Na-Cl<br />
Ca 2+ Cl - or Cl-Ca + or Cl-Ca-Cl<br />
Organic Anion + Inorganic Cation<br />
Draw these structures <strong>with</strong> bonds between the anion and the cation,<br />
e.g.,<br />
C-CO-O-Na, C-CO-O-Ca + or<br />
C-CO-O-Ca-O-CO-C<br />
Inorganic Anion + Organic Cation<br />
Draw these structures as disconnected ions <strong>with</strong> a charge, e.g.,<br />
(CH3)4N + Cl -<br />
Inorganic Acid Addition Salts of Organic Base<br />
Draw this salt and acid as two separate fragments on the same<br />
screen. Do not draw explicit hydrogens, e.g.,<br />
C-N Cl (methylamine.HCl)<br />
Organic Anion + Organic Cation<br />
The anion and cation are indexed as two separate records. To<br />
search, treat each component as a separate structure. Create two<br />
drawings, one for each component. Then, generate two strategies.<br />
Combine the hit lists <strong>with</strong> the AND operator and add the salt code<br />
manually.
WPI Fragmentation Codes 8–3<br />
Multi-atom<br />
Anions<br />
Simple Metal Containing Anions<br />
Place the charge on the metal atom, e.g.,<br />
O<br />
O<br />
Mn<br />
O<br />
O<br />
Simple Non-metal Containing Anions<br />
Draw multi-atom anions containing no metals, e.g., sulfate, carbonate, or<br />
phosphate, <strong>with</strong> bonds between the sulfur and the oxygen, or the carbon<br />
and the oxygen, or the phosphorus and the oxygen, e.g.,<br />
O<br />
O<br />
P<br />
O<br />
O<br />
Zwitterionic or Ampholytic Compounds<br />
Zwitterionic or ampholytic compounds are indexed as neutral molecules by<br />
shifting a hydrogen from the positive part of the compound to the negative.<br />
If this shift is not possible, the positive and negative parts are indexed<br />
according to the rules that govern individual acids and bases, e.g., an<br />
onium group is indexed as charged and an ionized organic acid is<br />
indexed as a free acid.<br />
<br />
N +<br />
O<br />
O<br />
S<br />
<br />
O<br />
Charge Separation Canonical Forms<br />
If there are no mobile hydrogen atoms and charges are on adjacent<br />
atoms, the bond order is raised and the charge is neutralized, e.g.,<br />
organic azides R-N=N≡N notR-N=N + =N -<br />
This is not permitted if the bond is a triple bond.
8–4 WPI Fragmentation Codes<br />
Dative Bonds<br />
Dative bonds drawn between two nonmetal atoms are represented by a<br />
double bond,<br />
e.g.,<br />
N<br />
O<br />
Dative bonds are only used between metals and ligands. Refer to the next<br />
section, Organometallic Complexes, for more details.<br />
Organometallic<br />
Complexes<br />
Draw all metals and ligands in the same screen. Place the charge on the<br />
cations and inorganic anions. Do not place a charge on an organic<br />
anions. Neutral ligands are joined to the metal by dative bonds, e.g.,<br />
Cr<br />
Carbonyls<br />
Draw carbonyl groups <strong>with</strong> double or triple bonds, e.g.,<br />
-C=O or -C≡O<br />
Acetylacetone and Related Complexes<br />
Draw acetylacetone and related complexes as two separate fragments.<br />
No bonds should be drawn between the metal atom and the acetylacetone<br />
group. Therefore, the code for the metal bound to the oxygen of the<br />
organic group will not be generated. However, this can be added<br />
manually.
WPI Fragmentation Codes 8–5<br />
Adjust the valency of the metal atom or apply charge to avoid filling empty<br />
valencies <strong>with</strong> hydrogen atoms, e.g.,<br />
O<br />
V<br />
<br />
O<br />
O<br />
The structure should be drawn in this way because attaching the<br />
vanadium to the oxo group would mean that the code for the two oxo<br />
groups would not be generated.<br />
Metal Phthalocyanines<br />
Draw metal phthalocyanine structures <strong>with</strong> single and double bonds.<br />
Attach two of the Nitrogens to the metal using dative bonds, e.g.,<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
M<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
N<br />
Metal-Carbon<br />
Bonds<br />
Draw metal-carbon bonds, where the metal is attached to a specific<br />
carbon atom, as single bonds, e.g.,<br />
C-C-C-C-Li n-butyl lithium<br />
For more complex systems, refer to the Organometallic Complexes<br />
section in this chapter.<br />
Extended<br />
Structures<br />
Draw extended structures, e.g., zeolites, according to the rules governing<br />
salts, e.g.,<br />
O O - O<br />
Na + Si Al -<br />
O O
8–6 WPI Fragmentation Codes<br />
Sugars<br />
Input cyclic sugar tautomers in acyclic form. Sugar codes (L8) are not<br />
generated automatically for these compounds. Select Include WPI Other<br />
Code Concepts from the Query menu to manually select sugar codes.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! automatically detects structures that may be a<br />
sugar and asks you if you want to apply the L8 Negation Code to your<br />
strategy during strategy generation.<br />
Elements and<br />
Alloys<br />
Elements that exist in molecular form in the free state are drawn in their<br />
normal form, e.g., O=O, F-F. However, you may draw elements as single<br />
atoms <strong>with</strong> the valency set to 0. Otherwise, empty valencies are filled <strong>with</strong><br />
hydrogen atoms.<br />
Alloys are indexed as extended structures and are searched using multifragment<br />
representation. The valencies of the metals are set to zero, <strong>with</strong><br />
no free sites.<br />
Quinone Diazides<br />
Draw quinone diazides, e.g., diazonium phenoxide, <strong>with</strong> no charge on the<br />
oxygen. Place the charge on the nitrogen.<br />
O<br />
N +<br />
N<br />
Hydrogen Atoms<br />
Hydrogen atoms should not be drawn except as values in G-groups.<br />
Select H as the value of a G-group by clicking on the Atoms button from<br />
the G-group definition dialog box.<br />
Select Deuterium and Tritium from the Atoms menu.<br />
Hydrogen atoms are assumed to fill the empty valencies on atoms. For<br />
example, an isolated carbon atom is treated as methane because carbon<br />
has a default valency of 4. To increase the number of hydrogen atoms<br />
attached to an atom, increase the valency of the atom.
WPI Fragmentation Codes 8–7<br />
Constructing<br />
Generic<br />
Queries<br />
Superatoms<br />
If you are creating a generic WPI structure query, you may use<br />
superatoms, G-groups, and/or Free Sites in your structure drawing.<br />
In a WPI format structure, superatoms act as predefined generic groups.<br />
They generate codes for all of the groups or atoms covered in the<br />
definition.<br />
Superatoms include:<br />
ACT Actinide (including actinium)<br />
AMX Alkali (ne Earth) Metal<br />
ARY Aryl-Carbocyclic, optionally fused, containing at least 1<br />
benzene ring<br />
A35 Group IIIa-Va Metal - Al, Ga, In, Tl, Ge, Sn, Pb, Sb, Bi<br />
CHE Alkenyl, Alkenylene<br />
CHK Alkyl, Alkylene<br />
CHY Alkynyl, Alkynylene<br />
CYC Cycloaliphatic - Carbocyclic, optionally fused<br />
HAL Halogen<br />
HEA Heterocyclic - Aromatic, Monocyclic (5 or 6 ring atoms)<br />
HEF Heterocyclic - Fused, optionally aromatic<br />
HEO Heterocyclic - containing metal, halogen or B, Si, P or As<br />
HET Heterocyclic - Non-aromatic, Monocyclic<br />
LAN Lanthanide (including Lanthanum)<br />
MX Metal, any<br />
TM1 First series transition metals<br />
TM2 Second series transition metals<br />
TM3 Third series transition metals<br />
TRM Transition Metals excluding Lanthanum<br />
TX O, S, Se, Te<br />
UX O, S, Se, Te, N<br />
ZX B, Si, P, As<br />
For example, a structure containing a CHK (alkyl), generates codes for all<br />
the possible alkyl chains; a structure containing a HET generates codes to<br />
retrieve any monocyclic non-aromatic heterocyclic structures.
8–8 WPI Fragmentation Codes<br />
Placing<br />
Superatoms<br />
To place a superatom, follow the steps below.<br />
1. Select Chain Superatoms, Ring Superatoms, or Other<br />
Superatoms from the Draw menu.<br />
A dialog box is displayed for each respective command.<br />
2. Select a Superatom from the dialog box. Click Single Use to use<br />
the superatom once or Multiple Use to change it to your default.<br />
The superatom you choose is displayed in the Current Atom box<br />
on the Atom & Bond Palette.<br />
You may also right-click in the Current Atom box and type a<br />
Superatom or select a superatom from the scrollable list in the<br />
Atom Selection dialog box.<br />
To apply attributes to a superatom, you must:<br />
1. Click the Selection tool located on the Tool Palette. Then select<br />
a superatom that is in your structure query.<br />
2. Select Other Attributes from the QueryDef menu. A dialog box<br />
is displayed that contains attribute options.<br />
☞ This dialog box varies depending on the superatom you<br />
selected.<br />
☞ You may also right-click on the superatom <strong>with</strong> the Selection<br />
or Pencil tool and select other attributes from the pop-up list.<br />
Modify the attributes by clicking an arrow to display the pulldown menu for<br />
each attribute and selecting the appropriate menu item. Click OK when<br />
attributes are complete. Click Cancel to cancel the changes.
WPI Fragmentation Codes 8–9<br />
G-Groups<br />
G-Groups may be defined as atoms, shortcuts, superatoms, other G-<br />
groups, and/or as multi-atom fragments. You may insert a G-group before<br />
or after you define the G-group.<br />
Drawing a G-Group<br />
Right-click in the Current Atom box, located on the Atom & Bond Palette,<br />
to draw a G-group. The Atom Selection dialog box is displayed. Type a<br />
G-group, e.g., G1. Click Single Use to use it once or Multiple Use to<br />
make it your default.<br />
Click the Pencil tool. Place the G-group on a node and click.<br />
G-groups can be used more than once, but the values of the G-groups are<br />
not permuted <strong>with</strong> one another.<br />
G 1<br />
G 1<br />
G 1<br />
=H,Cl<br />
For this example, fragmentation codes are generated for an unsubstituted<br />
ring and a dichloro- substituted ring. Refer to the Generating the Strategy<br />
section later in this chapter for more details.<br />
If you define a G-group as another G-group, the values of the G-groups<br />
are permuted.<br />
G 1<br />
G 1<br />
=G 2<br />
=H,Cl<br />
G 2<br />
Fragmentation codes generated in this example include codes for an<br />
unsubstituted ring and a monochloro- and dichloro-substituted compound.<br />
G-Groups - Fragments<br />
Fragments included in the definition should be drawn on the screen before<br />
defining the G-group. The attachment point(s) must be indicated on each<br />
fragment. Single atoms <strong>with</strong> free sites or attributes should be drawn as<br />
fragments <strong>with</strong> 1 or 2 attachment points. To indicate an attachment, you<br />
must:<br />
1. Select G-Groups from the Draw menu<br />
2. Click @ point of attachment. Click Single Use to indicate one point of<br />
attachment or Multiple Use to indicate more than one.<br />
3. Click a node to indicate a point of attachment. An “@” symbol is<br />
displayed at the node. There is a limit of 20 attachment points per<br />
structure.
8–10 WPI Fragmentation Codes<br />
☞ No G-group orientation of fragments occurs when you save the WPI<br />
structure query. The G-group orientation occurs when you generate a<br />
Fragmentation Code strategy. See the Orienting Fragments section<br />
later in this chapter for more details.<br />
G-Groups - Superatoms<br />
Draw superatoms as single-node fragments, <strong>with</strong> attachment points.<br />
G-Groups - Nesting<br />
Fragments may contain additional G-groups and/or superatoms. Nest up<br />
to three levels of G-groups. Examples include:<br />
• G0 = Ph-G1<br />
• G1 = -C-G2,-C=O<br />
• G2 = -O-G3,-C=O<br />
• G3 = H,C,Et<br />
Notice that the G3 definition cannot contain another G-group because it<br />
would exceed the three-level nesting limit.<br />
For more information on defining G-groups, refer to Chapter 6, Structure<br />
Drawing.<br />
Displaying a G-Group<br />
You may display a G-group definition by:<br />
1. Selecting G-groups from the Draw menu<br />
2. Selecting Query Verification from the QueryDef menu<br />
Select Query Verification from the QueryDef menu to display a G-<br />
group definition. Click the radio button next to Select, at the top of the<br />
Query Verification screen, to mark those attributes you want to verify.<br />
Select Contents in the G-group list. Click OK.
WPI Fragmentation Codes 8–11<br />
Free Sites<br />
Free sites allow optional substitution on an atom or a superatom. Free<br />
sites are not assumed on structures and should be applied if you want to<br />
carry out a substructure search.<br />
Select an atom or superatom <strong>with</strong> the Selection tool. Select Free Sites<br />
from the QueryDef menu. Enter the number of free sites. The number of<br />
free sites determines the maximum number of neighbors (substituents)<br />
permitted on that site, regardless of its bond value.<br />
For example,<br />
-C<br />
retrieves: -CH3, -CH2F, -CHO, -CN, etc.<br />
-C 2<br />
retrieves: -CH3, -CH2F, -CHF2, -CHO, -CO2H, -CN<br />
When you generate a fragmentation code strategy for a structure <strong>with</strong><br />
free sites, you are prompted for substitution information at each free site.<br />
For more information, refer to the Format of Fragmentation Code<br />
Strategies section in this chapter.<br />
If your structure contains a free site on 2 or more atoms, it is possible that<br />
the substituents on these sites may combine to complete a ring. During<br />
Fragmentation Code generation, you are asked if this is possible for any<br />
pair of free sites in the structure.<br />
However, if two free sites are on the same atom in a ring, it is assumed<br />
that the substituents do not combine to complete a ring.<br />
For example, the structure below,<br />
does not retrieve,
8–12 WPI Fragmentation Codes<br />
You should draw this structure type <strong>with</strong> a G-group instead of a carbon.<br />
The G-group is defined as C <strong>with</strong> two free sites or CYC, ARY, HET, HEA,<br />
HEF, and HEO. The attributes on the heterocyclic superatoms should be<br />
“substituent attached to carbon”. This is the default for all heterocyclic<br />
superatoms except HEO.<br />
Ph-G1 G1 = C2<br />
, CYC, ARY, HEA, HET, HEF, HEO<br />
Other Concept<br />
Codes<br />
When generating a Fragmentation Code strategy, you may include nonstructural<br />
or sugar codes in your search.<br />
☞ You must save your WPI query to include Other Concept Codes.<br />
To use this feature, return to the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Main Menu & Toolbar. Then<br />
select Include WPI Other Code Concepts from the Query menu. The<br />
Other Code Concept dialog box is displayed.<br />
☞ The Other Concept Codes window is blank until you make your<br />
selections.<br />
Click Select Codes menu in the Other Code Concepts dialog box.<br />
Continue to make selections. The selected codes are displayed in the<br />
Current Selection and the Codes<br />
Selected dialog boxes.<br />
The codes you select are combined <strong>with</strong> the AND operator. AND<br />
operation specifies that all of the codes are present in the structure<br />
record. Click the AND operator, on the menu bar, to toggle it to the OR<br />
operator. OR operation specifies that at least one of the fragmentation<br />
codes is present in the structure record.<br />
Click Delete Last or Delete All to delete codes from the Codes Selected<br />
dialog box. Click Leave OCC to leave this environment. You are returned<br />
to the Main Menu bar.
WPI Fragmentation Codes 8–13<br />
Click Edit WPI Strategy from the Query menu to edit a strategy. Select a<br />
structure query file name. <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! warns you if there<br />
is a current strategy that may be overwritten.<br />
Generating<br />
the Strategy<br />
First, exit Structure Drawing. Save and name your structure file if you<br />
have not already done so.<br />
From the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Main Menu & Toolbar, select Generate WPI<br />
Strategy from the Query menu. An Open WPI Structure dialog box is<br />
displayed listing the WPI structures.<br />
Select a file name to preview the structure. Click a ✓ in the Generate<br />
RIN codes only box to only generate RINs for your WPI structure.<br />
If you selected a non-structural code or sugar code from Include WPI<br />
Other Code Concepts, you may include them in your strategy. Click<br />
Include OCC. If you did not pre-select one of these codes, the Include<br />
OCC button is unavailable.<br />
Click OK after completing your selections.<br />
Orienting<br />
Fragments<br />
If fragments contain two attachment points, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
asks you to specify their orientation. The parent structure is displayed<br />
<strong>with</strong> the G-group. An atom that the G-group is attached to is highlighted.<br />
Click the number of the attachment point that you want connected to the<br />
highlighted atom. Click Select. Select Show Fragment if you want to<br />
view the fragment.
8–14 WPI Fragmentation Codes<br />
Structures <strong>with</strong><br />
Free Sites<br />
If your structure contains free sites, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! asks you<br />
to restrict the substitution type at each free site.<br />
Click the checkmarks out of the boxes that you wish to exclude from your<br />
WPI strategy. Then click OK.<br />
☞ The Select Fragments dialog box is displayed for each node that has<br />
free sites. The choices available for substitution vary <strong>with</strong> each<br />
structure.<br />
If there are free sites present, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! displays a<br />
Groups/Codes Included/Excluded From Free Site Substituents dialog<br />
box allowing you to restrict the type of substitution in the overall structure.<br />
Basic Group<br />
Codes<br />
The Basic Group Codes dialog box is located on the left side of the<br />
Groups/Codes Included/Excluded From Free Site Substituents dialog<br />
box.<br />
Click a ✓ in the Rings Present dialog box to indicate that rings may be<br />
present in the structure other than those you have drawn. Then specify<br />
which type of ring may be present. These selections affect the basic<br />
group codes and multiplier codes included in your strategy.<br />
Negation Codes<br />
The Negation Codes are located on the right side of the Groups/Codes<br />
Included/Excluded From Free Site Substituents dialog box. Notice that<br />
every choice is pre-selected, i.e., these groups are assumed to be absent.<br />
Click the ✓ out of a group box to include the possibility that the group is<br />
present, i.e., to broaden the search.<br />
Click Deselect All to permit any of these groups in the WPI strategy.<br />
Click Select All to exclude all groups from the strategy, i.e., to narrow the<br />
search.<br />
When you have completed this selection process, click OK. A warning<br />
message is displayed informing you that the structure has been modified.<br />
You are asked if you want to generate the fragmentation codes. Click Yes<br />
to generate the codes.
WPI Fragmentation Codes 8–15<br />
Selecting SUBs<br />
A series of messages are displayed as the structural codes are<br />
processed. When the process completes, a Select Subs dialog box is<br />
displayed.<br />
A list of Subs (Subheadings) (M0-M6) is displayed. Select the ones you<br />
want to search. Then, click OK. Again, a series of messages are<br />
displayed as processing continues.<br />
When the process completes, a command file is displayed in the editor<br />
that lists the fragmentation code strategy. A file name has been assigned<br />
and the command file has been saved to disk.<br />
Editing the<br />
Strategy<br />
The Fragmentation Code strategy is displayed as an <strong>STN</strong> command file.<br />
You may display and edit this file, provided you are cautious of the script<br />
variables being used.<br />
Position the cursor on a code and select Code Definitions from the<br />
Utilities menu to see a definition of a fragmentation code.<br />
If you have edited the strategy, select Validate Codes from the Utilities<br />
menu. Check the fragmentation code strategy list for invalid codes. A<br />
warning message is displayed if invalid codes are found. This only<br />
detects mistyped codes. It does not check that your strategy was<br />
formatted correctly.<br />
Select Save from the File menu to save the strategy. Two files are saved.<br />
The <strong>STN</strong> command file using a .SC extension and a strategy control file<br />
using a .STG extension. The strategy file contains information linking the<br />
file and the <strong>STN</strong> command file.<br />
Printing the<br />
Strategy<br />
On the main <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Menu Bar, select Print WPI Strategy from the<br />
Query menu. You may include the WPI structure, the code definitions,<br />
the fragmentation code strategy, and the negation code definitions by<br />
selecting these options in the Select Data to Print dialog box.
8–16 WPI Fragmentation Codes<br />
Uploading the<br />
Strategy<br />
Select <strong>STN</strong> from the Logon menu to search the fragmentation code<br />
strategy. You are automatically logged on to <strong>STN</strong> using your <strong>STN</strong> logon<br />
setup you created in Chapter 4, Setup. If you did not set up an automatic<br />
logon, refer to Chapter 4.<br />
When the logon completes, you will see an arrow prompt (=>). Type FILE<br />
WPIDS or FILE LWPI at this prompt. Select Run Command file from the<br />
Query menu. Type the command file name. This file name ends in .SC.<br />
Select Exit from the File menu to return to the Main Menu & Toolbar. You<br />
are prompted to save the strategy if you have not previously done so.
9<br />
SPECINFO Queries<br />
SPECINFO Queries 9–1<br />
The SPECINFO File contains spectral data for a representative section of<br />
organic chemistry, including organometallic substances.<br />
SPECINFO features five calculation packages that produce different types<br />
of spectral data. They are:<br />
Calculation<br />
Packages<br />
CHESS<br />
Definition<br />
Searches for chemical structures identical or similar to a query structure<br />
(structure code similarity search)<br />
COUPCAL<br />
Estimates coupling constants for a query structure. Calculates and<br />
displays NMR-spectroscopic data.<br />
EDSPEC<br />
Modifies existing spectra or creates new spectra<br />
GETSPEC<br />
Searches for spectra similar to a query spectrum<br />
SPECAL<br />
Calculates and displays NMR spectra from a query structure
9–2 SPECINFO Queries<br />
Creating a<br />
SPECINFO<br />
Query<br />
Select Prepare Structure Query from the Query menu or click the<br />
Prepare Query button if it is located on your Structure Drawing Toolbar.<br />
Then select New/SPECINFO from the File menu or click the button that<br />
opens a new SPECINFO structure drawing window from the Structure<br />
Drawing Toolbar.<br />
You may also open an existing SPECINFO structure query, by selecting<br />
Open from the File menu or by clicking an Open button for SPECINFO<br />
queries from the Structure Drawing Toolbar.<br />
☞ If you open an existing structure that was created in the Standard,<br />
WPI, or Questel format and change it to the SPECINFO format, the<br />
structure is automatically converted to a SPECINFO structure. The<br />
original structure is retained in its original format and you are<br />
prompted to name the SPECINFO query when you save it.<br />
Use the commands and tools discussed in Chapter 6, Structure Queries,<br />
to draw your SPECINFO structure.<br />
The commands that differ from the <strong>STN</strong> Standard structure query<br />
commands are described next.<br />
Bond<br />
Command in<br />
Draw Menu<br />
Select Bond from the Draw menu to choose a bond value. You may also<br />
left click the Current Bond box from the Atom & Bond Palette to quickly<br />
display the Bond Selection dialog box.<br />
Three bonds are unique to SPECINFO queries. They include:<br />
• Aromatic<br />
• CO (Coordination)<br />
• CP (Coordination in pi-system)<br />
The remaining bonds are equivalent to those in standard <strong>STN</strong> structure<br />
queries.<br />
Select a bond and click Single Use to insert the bond one time, or<br />
Multiple Use to make it the default bond.<br />
The current bond value is displayed in the Current Bond box.
SPECINFO Queries 9–3<br />
QueryDef<br />
Menu for<br />
SPECINFO<br />
Queries<br />
The commands available in the QueryDef menu are described next.<br />
Query Verification is NOT available for SPECINFO structure queries<br />
because all attributes are visible in the structure.<br />
Other Attributes<br />
Select Other Attributes to change the default setting for the charge of a<br />
selected node.<br />
The default charge setting is 0 (zero). This setting retrieves substances<br />
that are both charged and uncharged.<br />
Delocalized<br />
Charge<br />
Select Delocalized Charge to change the delocalized charge default<br />
setting for selected nodes.<br />
☞ You MUST select at least consecutive two nodes <strong>with</strong> the Selection<br />
tool before selecting this command.<br />
In SPECINFO queries, a node may exist in more than one delocalized<br />
charge group.<br />
The default setting is Any. This setting retrieves substances <strong>with</strong> or <strong>with</strong>out<br />
a delocalized charge group.<br />
Searching a<br />
SPECINFO<br />
Query<br />
After you have created your SPECINFO query, save and name the file as<br />
you did <strong>with</strong> <strong>STN</strong> Standard queries. Refer to Chapter 6, Structure<br />
Queries. Select <strong>STN</strong> from the Logon menu to logon to <strong>STN</strong> online.<br />
When you have connected to <strong>STN</strong>, type FILE SPECINFO at the arrow<br />
prompt (=>). Select Upload Structure Query from the Query menu.<br />
Upload the structure you saved.<br />
Type RUN followed by the appropriate calculation package name<br />
(COUPCAL, SPECAL, or CHESS) and the L-number of the uploaded<br />
query. Continue responding to prompts. If you do not know the<br />
response, type a question mark (?). An explanation of the valid responses<br />
is displayed and you are reprompted for the information.
10<br />
Managing Transcripts<br />
This chapter describes<br />
Managing Transcripts 10–1<br />
• browsing transcripts<br />
• printing transcripts<br />
• viewing images<br />
• exporting transcripts as RTF files<br />
• modifying transcripts <strong>with</strong> transcript filters<br />
• customizing highlighting in transcripts<br />
• combining transcripts<br />
• editing transcripts <strong>with</strong> the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> editor<br />
Browsing<br />
Transcripts<br />
To browse a captured transcript, follow these steps:<br />
1. Select Browse Transcript from the Results menu on the Main Menu<br />
bar, or click Browse Transcript on the toolbar.
10–2 Managing Transcripts<br />
2. In the Transcript File dialog box, select a file name from the list and<br />
click Open.<br />
The Show structure queries option is selected. Deselect this option if<br />
you do not want to have structure queries included in the transcript.<br />
3. If your transcript contains downloaded images, i.e., TIFF, GIF, or<br />
JPEG images, answer the prompt whether to view them in context.<br />
The selected transcript file opens for browsing.
Managing Transcripts 10–3<br />
Saving transcripts<br />
as RTF files<br />
While you are browsing a transcript, you may save it as an RTF (Rich<br />
Text Format) file.<br />
1. Select Save As from the File menu.<br />
2. The RTF File dialog box opens <strong>with</strong> the transcripts listed as .rtf files.<br />
Select the transcript and click Save.<br />
The saved transcript automatically opens in the program associated <strong>with</strong><br />
.rtf documents.
10–4 Managing Transcripts<br />
Printing<br />
Transcripts<br />
To print a transcript from the Main Menu window, follow these steps.<br />
1. Select Print Transcript from the Results menu or from the Main<br />
Menu Toolbar.<br />
2. In the Transcript File dialog box, select the file for printing and click<br />
Open.<br />
3. Select the specifications in the Page Layout dialog box and enter any<br />
specifications for your printer.<br />
Select Print from the File menu to print a transcript from the <strong>STN</strong> Online<br />
and Results window while you are browsing a transcript. Select Print<br />
from the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results toolbar to start printing immediately.
Managing Transcripts 10–5<br />
Viewing<br />
Images<br />
While you are browsing or printing transcripts, TIFF, GIF, or JPEG<br />
downloaded images are displayed in context if you answer Yes to the<br />
prompt:<br />
In addition, you may display any TIFF images separately from the<br />
transcript text. Follow these steps.<br />
1. Select View TIFF image from the File menu.
10–6 Managing Transcripts<br />
2. A list of TIFF files is displayed in the TIFF File dialog box. Select the<br />
TIFF file you want to display.<br />
3. The TIFF image displays in a separate window.
Managing Transcripts 10–7<br />
Exporting<br />
Transcripts<br />
as RTF Files<br />
To export a transcript file to an RTF (Rich Text Format) file, follow these<br />
steps:<br />
1. Select Export Transcript from the Results menu.<br />
2. In the Transcript File dialog box, select a file and click Open.
10–8 Managing Transcripts<br />
3. In the RTF File dialog box, the transcript name is displayed <strong>with</strong> the<br />
.rtf extension. By default, the file is saved to the default transcripts<br />
folder, but you can direct it to any location on your PC. Click Save.<br />
The transcript automatically opens in the program associated <strong>with</strong> RTF<br />
files.<br />
Modifying<br />
Transcripts<br />
<strong>with</strong><br />
Transcript<br />
Filters<br />
You may easily modify an existing transcript using transcript filters. <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> offers five predefined filters. You may also define your own<br />
filters.<br />
To customize your transcript <strong>with</strong> predefined <strong>STN</strong> Transcript Filters,<br />
follow these steps:<br />
1. Select Browse Transcript and open an existing transcript that you<br />
want to modify.
2. Select Transcript Filters from the File menu.<br />
Managing Transcripts 10–9<br />
3. In the Transcript Filters dialog box, type the name of a new transcript.<br />
Click Save.
10–10 Managing Transcripts<br />
4. In the Specify Filter dialog box, select one of the predefined filters<br />
from the Load Filter list.<br />
Predefined Filter<br />
stn-ans<br />
stn-cmd<br />
stn-cmdh<br />
stn-strs<br />
stn-tifs<br />
Result<br />
a transcript <strong>with</strong> only answers<br />
a transcript <strong>with</strong> only <strong>STN</strong> commands<br />
a transcript <strong>with</strong> only <strong>STN</strong> commands<br />
and their results, excluding reactions<br />
a transcript <strong>with</strong> only structure graphics<br />
a transcript <strong>with</strong> only TIFF images<br />
5. Click OK in response to the message confirming that your new<br />
transcript has been created successfully.<br />
You may also define your own filter. To define your own filter, enter a new<br />
name in the Filter name box of the Transcript Filters dialog box. Enter<br />
the parameters for the information to remove. Click the Help button for<br />
details and examples of how to create customized transcript filters.
Managing Transcripts 10–11<br />
Customizing<br />
Highlighting<br />
in Transcripts<br />
In <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> you can create a list of terms to be highlighted in a<br />
transcript. Follow these steps.<br />
1. Select Browse Transcript to open a transcript.<br />
2. To create a dictionary file <strong>with</strong> your list of terms, select Edit<br />
Dictionary from the Edit menu.<br />
3. In the Dictionary File dialog box, click New to create a new<br />
dictionary file.
10–12 Managing Transcripts<br />
4. In the Edit Dictionary dialog box, type a term that you want<br />
highlighted in your transcript. Click Add to add it to the dictionary file.<br />
Continue adding up to ten terms. Terms will be listed in alphabetical<br />
order and are not case-sensitive. Click the color in which you want<br />
the terms highlighted. Click OK. Save the dictionary file at the next<br />
prompt.<br />
5. To apply the dictionary, select Install Dictionary from the Edit menu.<br />
In the Dictionary File dialog box, select the dictionary file to apply.<br />
Click Open.<br />
The selected dictionary file is applied to the current transcript, i.e., the<br />
terms that you have added to the dictionary file are now highlighted by<br />
displaying them in the color that you have selected.
Managing Transcripts 10–13<br />
Combining<br />
Transcripts<br />
Follow these steps to merge multiple transcript files into one file.<br />
1. Open any transcript file that you do not want to merge <strong>with</strong> another.<br />
While the transcript file is open, select Combine Transcripts from<br />
the File menu.<br />
2. The Combine Transcripts dialog box is displayed. Type a new file<br />
name in the File name box. Click Save.
10–14 Managing Transcripts<br />
3. The Select Transcripts to combine dialog box is displayed. Select a<br />
file that you want to combine and click Copy. The file is moved to the<br />
Selected Transcripts box. Select another transcript and click Copy.<br />
You may merge as many files as you need. Click OK to create the<br />
merged file.
Managing Transcripts 10–15<br />
Editing<br />
Transcripts<br />
<strong>with</strong> the <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> Editor<br />
To edit a transcript file <strong>with</strong> the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> editor, follow these steps:<br />
1. Select Edit Transcript from the Results menu or the toolbar.<br />
2. In the Edit Transcript File dialog box, select the transcript file to edit.<br />
3. The stnedit window is displayed.<br />
While capturing a transcript as a .trn file, two separate files are<br />
created: one contains text and the other contains graphics. Only the<br />
text file is displayed when using the Edit Transcript command.<br />
However, graphics and TIFF “call-out” lines are displayed in the<br />
appropriate locations. DO NOT modify these lines.<br />
In the stnedit window you may use the standard Cut, Copy, and Paste<br />
commands, as well as the File, Edit, Search, and Help menus.<br />
The Search menu provides commands to find and replace terms in your<br />
transcript file.<br />
Command in<br />
the Search menu<br />
Find (Ctrl+F)<br />
Find Next (Ctrl+F)<br />
Replace (Ctrl+H)<br />
Function<br />
to find a term in the transcript<br />
to find the next occurrence of your term<br />
to replace a term in the text <strong>with</strong> a term of your<br />
choice
10–16 Managing Transcripts<br />
Adding page<br />
breaks while<br />
editing transcripts<br />
You may add page breaks to a transcript while editing. There are two<br />
ways to do this.<br />
1. Position the cursor where you want a page break. Press the Ctrl key<br />
and the letter L simultaneously.<br />
2. Create a transcript that contains a page break while online by using<br />
the Start New Page command from the Results menu.<br />
While offline, edit the transcript containing the page break and copy<br />
the line to the clipboard. Edit the file to which you want to add the<br />
page break and paste the line where you want a page break added.<br />
☞ The page break needs to be on a line by itself and left justified.<br />
Using an<br />
alternative editor<br />
Instead of using the stnedit editor, you may choose to use another text<br />
editor. To use another editor, enter its path in General Preferences.<br />
Refer to Appendix A for information on General Preferences.<br />
If you have entered the path of an alternative editor, the file that you<br />
choose to edit is opened in that application.<br />
While editing a transcript in an alternative editor, you may use the<br />
features of that editor. However, because you must save the file as ASCII<br />
text, formatting and font assignments are ignored.
11<br />
Creating Reports and Tables 11–1<br />
Creating Reports and Tables<br />
Overview<br />
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions for creating reports or<br />
tables <strong>with</strong> the following <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> tools:<br />
Tool<br />
Predefined Report Tool<br />
Custom Report Tool<br />
Table Tool<br />
Function<br />
Creates patent reports from transcripts<br />
Prepares reports including only desired<br />
transcript data and formatting<br />
Creates a table of selected data from<br />
Search results<br />
The following topics are included in this chapter<br />
· Creating patent reports<br />
· Creating custom reports<br />
· Saving reports<br />
· Creating tables<br />
· Saving tables<br />
Creating<br />
Patent<br />
Reports<br />
Use the Predefined Report Tool to quickly create a formatted patent report<br />
from a transcript (.trn or .rtf) file.<br />
Only answers from the patent files or patent-containing files, e.g., CAplus,<br />
<strong>with</strong> the PI (Patent Information) field are included in a patent report<br />
generated by the Predefined Report Tool.<br />
The content and format of the predefined report may not be modified. To<br />
create a customized report, use the Custom Report Tool.<br />
After creating a transcript, follow these steps to create a predefined patent<br />
report.
11–2 Creating Reports and Tables<br />
Selecting the<br />
Predefined<br />
Report Tool<br />
Click the Predefined Report Tool button on the toolbar of the <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> Main Menu and the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window.<br />
You may also access the tool from the Results menu on the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
Main Menu or from the File menu of the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window.
Creating Reports and Tables 11–3<br />
Selecting<br />
transcript<br />
In the Transcript File dialog box, select the transcript file for your patent<br />
report. Click Open.<br />
Patent report<br />
A predefined report is automatically displayed <strong>with</strong> patent records from<br />
your transcript.
11–4 Creating Reports and Tables<br />
Creating<br />
Custom<br />
Reports<br />
Selecting the<br />
Custom Report<br />
Tool<br />
Click the Custom Report Tool button on the toolbar of the <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> Main Menu and the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window.<br />
You may also access the tool from Results on the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Main<br />
Menu or from the File menu of the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window.
Creating Reports and Tables 11–5<br />
Report Tool<br />
window<br />
Custom Report Tool opens the Report Tool window.<br />
Select from the buttons on the left side of the Report Tool window.
11–6 Creating Reports and Tables<br />
Alternatively, use the Next and Back buttons to move sequentially<br />
between screens. When selected, each button displays a screen <strong>with</strong><br />
options for you to choose. Once the transcripts are chosen, you can click<br />
buttons for different screens in any order.<br />
Button<br />
Transcript(s)<br />
Template<br />
Content<br />
Highlighting<br />
Cover Page<br />
Fields<br />
Statistics<br />
Function<br />
To select one or more transcripts for<br />
the report<br />
To select a template for the report<br />
To define the content of the report<br />
To define highlighting in the report<br />
To define the content and format of the<br />
cover page<br />
To select the fields from answers<br />
To define the charts for the report<br />
The Report Tool window also includes the following buttons on the bottom<br />
of the window:<br />
Button<br />
Save Template<br />
Finish<br />
Back<br />
Next<br />
Cancel<br />
Function<br />
To save a custom template for reports<br />
To produce the report once all<br />
selections for content and style have<br />
been made<br />
To go back to a previous screen<br />
To select the next screen<br />
To cancel the report-generation<br />
process
Creating Reports and Tables 11–7<br />
Transcript(s)<br />
This window is displayed when you select the Report Tool or when you<br />
click the Transcript(s) button in the Report Tool Window.<br />
The path for the most recently used transcript is displayed by default.<br />
Click on the Remove button on the right if you do not want to select this<br />
transcript for your report.<br />
Click on the Browse to Add button on the right to locate other transcripts.<br />
The Transcript File folder opens <strong>with</strong> a list of transcripts for you to<br />
choose. Select the desired transcript and click Open or browse for other<br />
file locations.<br />
Once you select another transcript, you are returned to the Transcript(s)<br />
window for the Report Tool. You may select multiple transcripts for a<br />
single report.
11–8 Creating Reports and Tables<br />
Template<br />
When you click on the Template button of the Report Tool, a list of the<br />
currently available templates (.prf files) is displayed. Only one predefined<br />
template - the patent template - is currently available. If you have defined<br />
and saved other report templates, their names are also displayed in this<br />
window.<br />
The Description box shows a summary of the attributes of the selected<br />
template.<br />
Report and Table templates display separately. To view both report and<br />
table templates, choose the All radio button. A Table template may be<br />
used for a report and vice versa, but attributes that are not applicable will<br />
be ignored.<br />
To locate templates that are not in the default Transcripts folder, clock the<br />
Change Folder button and navigate to that location.<br />
Click Choose Template to select the highlighted template for this report.<br />
If no template is chosen, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> sends a prompt for verification.<br />
Click Ignore to continue to define a custom report.
Creating Reports and Tables 11–9<br />
Content<br />
In the Content window you may select parts of the transcript for your<br />
report. Click in the appropriate boxes to include this content in your<br />
report.<br />
When the Report Tool is used again, the previous content selections will<br />
be recalled.<br />
Highlighting
11–10 Creating Reports and Tables<br />
The Highlighting screen shows the following options:<br />
Highlighting option<br />
Highlight Hit Terms<br />
Highlight the Following Terms<br />
Highlight Terms in this<br />
Text File<br />
Result if selected<br />
Hit-terms are highlighted in red. Select<br />
the Format button to change the font<br />
and/or the color of highlighting. To<br />
remove any hit-term highlighting,<br />
deselect this option.<br />
Type the terms to be highlighted.<br />
Choose Format to change the font and/<br />
or color of highlighting. The highlighted<br />
terms may be any terms in your<br />
answers. Terms should be separated<br />
<strong>with</strong> commas. Multiword terms between<br />
commas will be highlighted only when<br />
the entire phrase is present. This<br />
feature is case-insensitive.<br />
Highlight a list of terms saved in a text<br />
file. Browse for a saved file. Choose<br />
Format to change the font and/or color<br />
of highlighting. Each line of the text file<br />
is treated as a phrase. This feature is<br />
case-insensitive.<br />
When you select Format, the following options are displayed. If you<br />
leave blanks in the Font menus, the highlighted text will follow the font<br />
definitions from the Fields screen for the field in which it occurs.
Creating Reports and Tables 11–11<br />
Cover page<br />
1. Select <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Cover Page if you want to create a cover page<br />
for your report.<br />
1. Choose the content of your cover page by selecting from the options<br />
on the left, e.g., Title. Note that Title, Prepared By, and For may not<br />
be de-selected.<br />
2. Choose if you want to center the Title, Prepared By, and For. If you<br />
do not select this option, all elements of the cover page are leftjustified.<br />
3. Select the order of appearance of the selected items on the cover<br />
page by highlighting the item and moving it <strong>with</strong> the up and down<br />
buttons.<br />
If the centered option, e.g., Title, is selected, you cannot change the<br />
order of the Title, Prepared By, and For.
11–12 Creating Reports and Tables<br />
4. Click on the tab for each desired selection, e.g., Title, to enter or<br />
modify the existing information and default format for the selection.<br />
For example, when you click on the Title tab, the default title, consisting of<br />
the names of the transcripts, is displayed in the default font and size. You<br />
may modify or replace the text and select the Format button to change the<br />
font.<br />
Other items that are automatically filled include:<br />
• Prepared by (from <strong>User</strong> Data in Preferences)<br />
• Date of Search (from the file-creation date)<br />
• Strategy (from last DISPLAY HISTORY in transcript)<br />
• Update Information (from databases entered in transcript)<br />
• Cost (last cost display in transcript).
Creating Reports and Tables 11–13<br />
Fields<br />
When you select the Fields button on the left, you are guided in selecting<br />
the fields for your report.<br />
The available fields are those found in the transcripts. The fields are listed<br />
alphabetically in the Field Name window on the left. A blank Selected<br />
Fields window is displayed on the right.<br />
Use the buttons in the middle of the screen for selecting the fields:<br />
Button<br />
Insert<br />
Insert All<br />
Rename<br />
Delete<br />
Delete All<br />
Function<br />
Insert any highlighted fields from the<br />
Field Name list into the Selected Fields<br />
list<br />
Insert all the fields from the Field Name<br />
list into the Selected Fields list<br />
Rename a highlighted field from the<br />
Field Name list<br />
Delete any highlighted fields from the<br />
Selected Fields list<br />
Delete all the fields from the Selected<br />
Fields list<br />
For example, you might want to use the Insert All button to select all<br />
fields, and then use the Delete button to delete any fields that are not<br />
desired. You may select multiple fields using the Shift and Ctrl keys.
11–14 Creating Reports and Tables<br />
You may also change the order of selected fields by using the Change<br />
Order buttons on the right.<br />
You may change the format of any highlighted fields on the right by<br />
clicking on the Change Font button. The information that displays to the<br />
right of the Change Font button reflects the properties of the fields in the<br />
Selected Fields box.<br />
An example of the final selection for a report is shown.<br />
Statistics<br />
This window is used for defining histograms or pie charts in your report.<br />
You may create up to 3 histograms or pie charts from the transcript as<br />
part of the report.<br />
Choose one field for each histogram or pie chart. You may also choose<br />
to display the graphs at the beginning or at the end of your report.
Creating Reports and Tables 11–15<br />
Saving template<br />
Click the Save Template button when you want to save the attributes of<br />
the current report as a template for future use.<br />
In the Saving a Template dialog box enter the name for your template and<br />
click Save.<br />
Generating report<br />
To generate a custom report, click Finish. The report is displayed.
11–16 Creating Reports and Tables<br />
Editing reports<br />
To edit a field in a report, follow these steps:<br />
1. Right-click on the field.<br />
2. Choose Edit Field<br />
3. Make the changes<br />
4. Click OK.<br />
Inserting<br />
comments in<br />
reports<br />
To insert a comment for an answer, follow these steps:<br />
1. Right-click on the answer.<br />
2. Choose Edit Record Comments<br />
3. Type the comment.<br />
4. Click OK.<br />
Comments are visible on .rep files only, and appear when the mouse is<br />
passed over the Answer Selection Box.<br />
Saving<br />
Reports<br />
You may save a report as the following types of files:<br />
• <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> report (.rep) file<br />
• Rich Text Format (.rtf) file<br />
• HTML (.htm) file<br />
• Microsoft Excel (.xls) file<br />
• ASCII (.txt) file.<br />
Saving as <strong>STN</strong><br />
Report files<br />
To save a report as an <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Report (.rep file), follow these steps:<br />
1. Select Save from the File menu in the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results<br />
window.
Creating Reports and Tables 11–17<br />
2. In the Enter Filename dialog box, select the transcript and choose the<br />
.rep format for the saved file (.rep is the only type of format available<br />
when you use the Save option).<br />
Saving reports in<br />
RTF, HTML, and<br />
XLS formats<br />
1. Select Save As from the File menu to save the report in standard<br />
formats: RTF, HTML, or XLS.
11–18 Creating Reports and Tables<br />
2. In the Enter Filename dialog box, choose the format for the saved file<br />
and enter or modify the file name.<br />
Saving marked<br />
answers in<br />
custom reports<br />
1. Each record in the custom report is preceded by a selection box.<br />
Click on the selection box to mark this record for saving.
2. Select Save Marked Answers from the File menu.<br />
Creating Reports and Tables 11–19<br />
3. Another Report window opens, showing only the selected answers.<br />
Once you are certain that it contains the answers you desire, save<br />
the report by selecting Save As from the File menu and choosing the<br />
file format.
11–20 Creating Reports and Tables<br />
Creating<br />
Tables<br />
To create tables of data from answers in your transcripts, use the Table<br />
Tool. For example, you may create tables <strong>with</strong>:<br />
• substance names, molecular formulas, and structures from the<br />
Registry file<br />
• titles, patent assignees, and IPCs from patent records<br />
• patent numbers, titles, and graphics<br />
• trademarks and related data from the trademark files EUMAS and<br />
DEMAS.<br />
Selecting the<br />
Table Tool<br />
To use the Table Tool, follow this procedure.<br />
1. Click on the Table Tool button . This button is available on the<br />
toolbar of the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Main Menu and the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results<br />
window.<br />
You may also access the Table Tool from the Results menu of the <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> Main Menu or from the File menu of the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results<br />
window.<br />
Table Tool<br />
window<br />
The Table Tool window is displayed. To create a table from answers in your<br />
transcript, select from the buttons on the left side panel of the Table Tool<br />
window. When selected, each button displays a window <strong>with</strong> options for<br />
you to choose.
Creating Reports and Tables 11–21<br />
The Table Tool window contains the following buttons for your use:<br />
Button<br />
Transcript(s)<br />
Template<br />
Highlighting<br />
Cover Page<br />
Fields<br />
Statistics<br />
Function<br />
To select transcripts for the table<br />
To select a template for the table<br />
To define highlighting in the table<br />
To define the content and format of the<br />
cover page<br />
To select the fields (from answers<br />
displayed) to include in the table<br />
To define the charts<br />
The Table Tool window also includes the following buttons (on the bottom of<br />
the window):<br />
Button<br />
Save Template<br />
Finish<br />
Back<br />
Next<br />
Cancel<br />
Function<br />
To save a template for tables<br />
To product the table once all selections<br />
for content and style have been made<br />
To go back to a previous screen<br />
To select the next screen<br />
To cancel the selections on a screen
11–22 Creating Reports and Tables<br />
Selecting Table<br />
Tool buttons<br />
Selecting any of the Table Tool buttons results in the same type of<br />
interaction as that produced by the same button of the Report Tool. Refer<br />
to the section on Creating Custom Reports in this chapter for details.<br />
Fields<br />
The following example shows only the Fields screen of the Table Tool<br />
followed by an example of a table that was created.<br />
Selecting the Row field results in each row being numbered.<br />
If you choose Answer for the Selected Fields, answer numbers from<br />
search results will be included in the table.
Creating Reports and Tables 11–23<br />
Generating Table<br />
Click Finish when you are done. The table is displayed for you to use.<br />
Editing tables<br />
You may edit tables by<br />
• editing cells<br />
• copying cells<br />
• deleting rows<br />
• sorting columns<br />
Right-click on the cell, row, or column that you want to modify. Select the<br />
operation from the displayed menu of options. For example, select Delete<br />
row to delete the row.<br />
Resizing the<br />
columns<br />
To resize the columns in the table<br />
• place your cursor on a column separator<br />
• when your cursor changes to resemble a ladder, <strong>with</strong> left-right<br />
pointing arrows, hold down the left mouse key and drag the column<br />
separator to the desired position<br />
• release your mouse button
11–24 Creating Reports and Tables<br />
Saving Tables<br />
You may save tables as the following types of files:<br />
• Excel Files (*.xls)<br />
• <strong>Express</strong> Table Files (*.tbl)<br />
• RTF Files (*rtf)<br />
• ASCII Text (*.txt)<br />
• HTML Files (*.htm)<br />
Follow these steps:<br />
1. Select Save As from the File menu.
Creating Reports and Tables 11–25<br />
2. The Enter Filename dialog box is displayed. Enter the name of the<br />
file in the File name box. In the Save as type box, choose the type of<br />
file for saving.
12 Accounting<br />
Overview<br />
Accounting 12–1<br />
With the Accounting feature of <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> you can create a report that<br />
contains estimated online session costs for your <strong>STN</strong> sessions. You can<br />
customize the report to show what is reported, in what time frame, and<br />
how the report looks. In addition, you can easily export the accounting<br />
information in various formats, e.g., as an Excel file.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> automatically saves accounting information for <strong>STN</strong> sessions<br />
in the file account.dat.<br />
Viewing<br />
Accounting<br />
Reports<br />
To view the accounting information, follow these steps:<br />
1. Select Accounting from the Results menu on the Main Menu bar.<br />
You may also select the Accounting button<br />
your Main Menu Toolbar.<br />
if you have added it to
12–2 Accounting<br />
2. In the Select Account File dialog box, choose an Account file from<br />
your Uscripts folder. The default file name is account.dat. Click<br />
Open.<br />
3. Your online accounting is shown in the <strong>STN</strong> Accounting window. The<br />
estimated costs are displayed in a tabular format.
Accounting 12–3<br />
To resize the columns in the table<br />
• place your cursor on a column separator<br />
• when your cursor changes to resemble a ladder, <strong>with</strong> left-right<br />
pointing arrows, hold down the left mouse key and drag the column<br />
separator to the desired position<br />
• release your mouse button<br />
Customizing<br />
Accounting<br />
Table<br />
You can customize the accounting table by:<br />
• changing the accounting table parameters, e.g., list the fields to<br />
include or exclude<br />
• defining the time span, i.e., the year and months for the report<br />
Changing the<br />
accounting table<br />
parameters<br />
1. In the <strong>STN</strong> Accounting window, click on Setup and select Report.<br />
2. Customize the parameters in the Report Settings dialog box.
12–4 Accounting<br />
Parameter Function<br />
Field Name<br />
Font<br />
Column Width<br />
Alignment<br />
Sort Key<br />
Units<br />
Selected Fields<br />
Choose up to 8 fields (columns) to monitor,<br />
including a blank column that can be used for<br />
comments, notes, etc. when you export the<br />
accounting file<br />
Choose from among a variety of fonts, styles, and<br />
point size in your report<br />
Define the width of the selected field<br />
Indicate the placement of text <strong>with</strong>in each column<br />
as left justified, right justified, or centered<br />
Define the primary and secondary sort fields for<br />
sorting cost information<br />
Choose the unit of measure for the width of your<br />
table<br />
Insert, delete, and change the order of selected<br />
fields in your table<br />
Defining the<br />
date range<br />
To define the range of dates for your accounting report, follow these<br />
steps:<br />
1. In the <strong>STN</strong> Accounting window, select Date Range from the Setup<br />
menu.<br />
2. In the Set Range dialog box, select the year and months for your<br />
report.
Accounting 12–5<br />
Exporting<br />
Accounting<br />
Data<br />
To export an accounting report, follow these steps:<br />
1. Select Export from the File menu in the <strong>STN</strong> Accounting window.<br />
2. In the Enter Export Filename dialog box, select or enter the following:<br />
• the file name to represent the exported file<br />
• the file format for the exported data, e.g., Excel.<br />
Click Save.<br />
If you choose the format as Excel Files, the accounting information is<br />
displayed as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, if you have the software<br />
available on your PC.
12–6 Accounting<br />
Clearing<br />
Accounting<br />
Data<br />
To clear all cost and session information from the accounting file that you<br />
have opened, select Clear Data File from the File menu.<br />
This feature does not remove the file, but only erases the data. If you<br />
would like to save these data for future reference, make a copy of the<br />
account.dat file before clearing the data file.<br />
An informatory message appears that requests confirmation of the action.
Appendix<br />
A<br />
Types of<br />
Preferences<br />
Preferences<br />
There are three types of Preferences:<br />
• General<br />
• <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results<br />
• Structure Drawing<br />
Preferences A–1<br />
Structure Drawing preferences are described in Chapter 6. Structure<br />
Queries. This appendix describes the General and <strong>STN</strong> Online and<br />
Results preferences.<br />
In addition, two preferences in the Host Settings window of Setup are<br />
noted.<br />
Accessing<br />
Preferences<br />
To access all preferences, click the Preferences tool<br />
Menu toolbar or from the Setup menu of the Main Menu.<br />
from the Main
A–2 Preferences<br />
General<br />
Preferences<br />
General Preferences is used to:<br />
• customize default folders for use in <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
• customize the display of the Main Menu and Toolbar<br />
• select the language that <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> and related programs use for<br />
the display of menus and buttons<br />
• specify your own text editor<br />
The folders defined here are used by default to save or open a file. You<br />
may choose another folder each time you open or save a file.<br />
Changing editor<br />
In General Preferences you may also designate another editor, rather<br />
than the text editor provided <strong>with</strong>in <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>. This option lets you take<br />
advantage of features of other editor packages. Type or paste the<br />
complete path to the editor program in the Editor box. If this box is blank,<br />
the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> built-in editor is used.
Preferences A–3<br />
Changing folders<br />
To change a folder:<br />
• Click in the text box of the folder you wish to change and type in the<br />
pathname, or<br />
• Click in the text box of the folder you wish to change. Then doubleclick<br />
a folder or drive letter in the folder selection box, located above<br />
the Set *Path To button, to select the appropriate folder. Click the<br />
Set *Path To button once the desired pathname is displayed.<br />
Customizing<br />
Main Toolbar<br />
You may also customize the display of the Main Menu and Toolbar by<br />
clicking the following options:<br />
Option selected<br />
Toolbar<br />
Always on top<br />
Minimize on use<br />
Tooltips<br />
Result<br />
Display the toolbar buttons in <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> (default)<br />
Force the Main Menu & Toolbar to<br />
remain visible at all times<br />
Minimize the Main Menu & Toolbar<br />
after accessing an <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
application<br />
Control whether the main Toolbar<br />
has tool tips in addition to the text on<br />
the buttons<br />
Selecting the<br />
language<br />
You may also select the language that <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> and related programs<br />
use for the display of menus and buttons. To use Japanese you must<br />
have a Japanese version of Windows. The language setting takes effect<br />
as soon as you click OK. Other <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> programs that are already<br />
running must be restarted before the language is changed.
A–4 Preferences<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Online<br />
and Results<br />
Preferences<br />
To access the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results preferences, click the Preferences<br />
tool on the toolbar of the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window or the Main<br />
Menu toolbar.<br />
Click one of the tabs to change those preferences.<br />
Account<br />
In the <strong>STN</strong> Account Type box, select the type of account you have and its<br />
features:<br />
• Commercial (Full access) - default setting<br />
• Full Academic - if you have access to <strong>STN</strong> files under your<br />
academic program<br />
• FIZ Academic - if you have access to FIZ discounted files only<br />
• CAS & FIZ Academic - if you have access only to CAS and FIZ files<br />
under your academic program<br />
• BEILSTEIN subscriber - if you have a Beilstein subscription<br />
• GMELIN subscriber - if you have a GMELIN subscription<br />
• DERWENT subscriber - if you have a DERWENT subscription<br />
Under Property Data Databases, select the property databases that the<br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! wizards are authorized to access.
Preferences A–5<br />
Function Keys<br />
Use the Function Keys tab to define keyboard shortcuts for frequently<br />
used text strings.<br />
Up to 18 key combinations may be defined, using Shift F1-F9 and<br />
Control-Alt F1- F9.<br />
To define a Shift Function Key, click the radio button next to Shift. Type<br />
a text string in any of the function key boxes.<br />
To define a Control-Alt Function Key, click the radio button next to<br />
Control-Alt. A new list is displayed. Type a text string in any of the<br />
function key boxes.<br />
☞<br />
Type [cr] at the end of a line to insert a carriage return after each<br />
string.
A–6 Preferences<br />
Online<br />
Use the Online tab to customize your online environment. Click in the box<br />
adjacent to the preferences you want to activate. Then click OK.
Preferences A–7<br />
Option selected<br />
Continuous scrolling<br />
Modifiable Queries<br />
Use Filters<br />
Result<br />
Text and graphics scroll <strong>with</strong>out<br />
interruption (recommended)<br />
Uploaded structure queries may be<br />
modified in the STRUCTURE<br />
command<br />
Automatically upload structure filters<br />
when they are available<br />
Enable idle time warning Warning message is displayed after<br />
Logoff no commands are sent to <strong>STN</strong> for 15<br />
Logoff Hold<br />
minutes<br />
File Transfer<br />
Long Packets 4000<br />
File Transfer<br />
Log Packets<br />
Reduce CPU usage when Online<br />
Display international characters<br />
Logon splash screen frequency<br />
once per day<br />
Autoload command history into<br />
Command Window<br />
Faster Kermit downloads of TIFF<br />
images and other files (recommended)<br />
A log of upload and download<br />
(Kermit) activity is created. Select<br />
only on request by <strong>STN</strong> support staff<br />
for problem resolution.<br />
Puts <strong>STN</strong> Terminal Emulation into a<br />
passive mode that uses less CPU<br />
resources when waiting for you to<br />
enter data. If this option is not<br />
selected, <strong>STN</strong> Terminal Emulation uses<br />
all the idle CPU time on your local<br />
system, <strong>with</strong>out degrading<br />
performance of your machine.<br />
Allows proper display of international<br />
characters when you are connected<br />
to an online host that supports those<br />
characters. This option cannot be<br />
used if the connection route to the host<br />
computer requires the use of parity. If<br />
the data display from your online host<br />
appears to be corrupt, turn this option<br />
off. If the problem is resolved, then<br />
your connection is using parity.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> logon splash screen is<br />
displayed once per calendar day<br />
Command history for the current<br />
session is automatically loaded at<br />
the time you open the command<br />
window.
A–8 Preferences<br />
Colors/Fonts/<br />
Scaling<br />
Click the Colors/Fonts/Scaling tab to define colors and fonts in your<br />
online window or Browse Transcript window or for prints; to scale<br />
structure graphics; and modify TIFF viewer scale settings.<br />
To change the color of highlighted text or the color of the text you type at a<br />
prompt, click the radio button adjacent to Highlight text or Prompt text,<br />
respectively. Then click the color that you want.<br />
To change the font of text in the online window or browser window or when<br />
printing, click the Change button in the Display Font box or the Printer<br />
Font box, respectively. A Font dialog box is displayed. You may modify<br />
the font and point size.<br />
☞<br />
For display fonts, only fixed-width fonts are available. For print fonts,<br />
only fixed width printer and True Type fonts are available.<br />
Proportional fonts are not available because text does not line up<br />
properly when they are used.<br />
To change the horizontal or vertical scaling factor for structure graphics,<br />
click in the entry box. Enter a new scaling factor. The defaults are 1.0<br />
for both scaling factors. If the two factors are not changed<br />
proportionately, vertical or horizontal distortion will occur.<br />
To modify the initial scale used by the TIFF Viewer, click the appropriate<br />
radio button next to the Full, Half, or Quarter option.
Links<br />
Preferences A–9
A–10 Preferences<br />
Option selected<br />
Use a single browser for<br />
all WWW links<br />
Launch a new browser<br />
window for each WWW link<br />
Override Windows default<br />
browser<br />
Change to <strong>STN</strong>GUIDE when<br />
jumping to the WWW<br />
Full-text links<br />
Use secure ChemPort link<br />
Return to original file after<br />
executing <strong>STN</strong> links<br />
(not Full-text)<br />
Enable Links<br />
Result<br />
Existing browser window is reused, if it<br />
is already running. If the browser<br />
window is not running, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> will<br />
launch the browser (default).<br />
A new browser window is opened for<br />
each WWW link, resulting in multiple<br />
open windows.<br />
If you have several internet browsers<br />
installed, this option allows you to<br />
specify the path to the one that you<br />
prefer.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! moves<br />
your online session to the <strong>STN</strong>GUIDE<br />
file any time you request a web<br />
function. When you are ready to<br />
continue your <strong>STN</strong> session in another<br />
file, you have to enter that file.<br />
Select the <strong>STN</strong> service center where<br />
you have your account<br />
Select for extra security when you click<br />
Full-text links; may be selected only for<br />
access to ChemPort from <strong>STN</strong>-<br />
Columbus.<br />
Return to original file after <strong>STN</strong> links,<br />
except for Full-text, are executed.<br />
Selected items are hyperlinked when<br />
you are logged on to <strong>STN</strong>.
Preferences A–11<br />
Postprocessing<br />
Postprocessing preferences allow you to set preferences related to<br />
transcripts.
A–12 Preferences<br />
Option selected<br />
Capture at logon<br />
Capture as RTF<br />
Confirm Transcript<br />
Capture Stop<br />
Wrap Abstracts in Export<br />
Use fixed-width fonts on<br />
non-wrapping fields in<br />
reports and tables<br />
Enable Full-Text links in<br />
reports and exported<br />
transcripts<br />
Symbol characters<br />
Expand abbreviations<br />
Launch Excel when<br />
saving as Excel<br />
Launch Word when<br />
saving as RTF<br />
Combine Author and<br />
Inventor in Reports and<br />
Tables<br />
Combine Patent Assignees<br />
and Corporate Source<br />
Autosave Transcript<br />
Default Font<br />
Result<br />
Transcript is automatically captured at logon<br />
(default)<br />
Transcript is captured in Rich Text Format.<br />
Confirmation message is displayed if you<br />
stop capture of transcript (default).<br />
Text of abstracts is automatically wrapped in<br />
RTF transcripts (default).<br />
Tabular <strong>STN</strong> data, e.g., patent family<br />
information, line up in reports and tables<br />
(default).<br />
Full-text links are preserved in reports and<br />
RTF transcripts (default).<br />
Symbols and special characters, e.g., Greek<br />
letters, display as symbols or special<br />
characters in reports, tables, and transcripts<br />
(default).<br />
CAS standard abbreviations are automatically<br />
expanded in transcripts, e.g., “oxidn.” is<br />
expanded to “oxidation” (default).<br />
Microsoft Excel (the application associated<br />
<strong>with</strong> .xls files) is launched when a file is saved<br />
in Excel format (default).<br />
Microsoft Word (the application associated<br />
<strong>with</strong> .rtf files) is launched when a file is saved<br />
in RTF (Rich Text Format (default).<br />
Combine author and inventor data in<br />
reports and tables.<br />
Combine patent assignees and corporate<br />
source in reports and tables.<br />
Transcript is periodically saved for a specified<br />
number of minutes, while you are online.<br />
Click Change to change the default font for<br />
custom reports, tables, and exported<br />
transcripts.
Preferences A–13<br />
<strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
Option selected<br />
Suppress background display<br />
of <strong>Discover</strong>! commands<br />
Histogram in Analyze<br />
Answers Wizard<br />
Edit Alert L-number deletion<br />
warning<br />
Result<br />
<strong>STN</strong> commands generated by<br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! wizards are not displayed in<br />
the session window until the wizard<br />
function is completed.<br />
When the Analyze Answers wizard of<br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! is used, analyzed results<br />
are presented graphically as<br />
histograms.<br />
Warning is displayed when a deletion<br />
of an L-number used in an SDI alert is<br />
requested.<br />
Return to original file after Online session returns to the original<br />
closing a wizard file after a wizard function is<br />
completed.<br />
Activate uploaded structure<br />
queries in<br />
Uploaded structure queries are<br />
activated in LREGISTRY by default.<br />
You may select another structuresearchable<br />
file in which to activate<br />
uploaded structure queries.
A–14 Preferences<br />
<strong>User</strong> data<br />
Under this tab, you can enter data that appear on the cover page of<br />
reports and tables. This information is also used to identify you when you<br />
click Request Help on the Help menu in order to send a message to your<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Service Center.
Preferences A–15<br />
Layout<br />
Use the Layout tab to customize the layout of your <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results<br />
window.<br />
• Status bar - select the items to display in the Status Bar located at<br />
the bottom of the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results window.<br />
• Show Toolbar - select to show the Toolbar<br />
• Open Command Window in locked mode - if locked mode is<br />
selected, you can enter multiple commands in the Command Window<br />
before sending them to the host. If locked mode is not selected, the<br />
Command Window opens in Send mode, which sends a command<br />
directly to the host when a carriage return is pressed.
A–16 Preferences<br />
Cost warning<br />
Option selected<br />
Issue cost warning when<br />
requesting all answers<br />
using ‘1-’<br />
Issue cost warning before<br />
display commands exceeding<br />
Issue cost warning before<br />
search commands exceeding<br />
Result<br />
Warning is displayed when a<br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! script contains the TOTAL<br />
display option requesting a display of<br />
all answers from an answer set.<br />
A warning is displayed before a<br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! script or a wizard would<br />
exceed the cost limit you have set for<br />
answer display.<br />
A warning is displayed before a<br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! script or a wizard executes<br />
a search command that would exceed<br />
the cost limit you have set.
Preferences A–17<br />
Host Settings<br />
Preferences<br />
There are two preferences located on the Host Settings window in Setup.<br />
Option<br />
Command Window<br />
Close Window at logoff<br />
Result if selected<br />
Command Window is opened when<br />
you logon to <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> session window closes<br />
after you logoff from <strong>STN</strong>.
Appendix<br />
B<br />
ALCHEMY<br />
ALCHEMY B–1<br />
ALCHEMY 2000 is a powerful molecular graphics and computation tool for<br />
your desktop computer. It features high-performance visualization for all<br />
types of chemical structures, including proteins, polymers, and small<br />
molecules. Features in ALCHEMY 2000 include:<br />
• Molecular Dynamics - A tool where you can examine the vibrational<br />
motion of the molecules as a function of time. You may also monitor<br />
distances and angles throughout the run and create dynamic<br />
playbacks of results for visual insight. Results are returned in a table<br />
format. Note that a wizard is available to lead you through setting up<br />
the calculation and data reporting.<br />
• Conformational Searching - The opportunity to explore<br />
conformational spaces of flexible molecules to find global minimum<br />
geometries that satisfy specific distance constraints. Searching may<br />
be done by specified increments or randomly assigned values in<br />
selected dihedrals. Note that a Conformational Search Wizard is<br />
available for your convenience.<br />
• Intermolecular Interactions - Create an energy function describing<br />
the interaction of a small molecule at the site of a large molecule and<br />
minimize it to determine a geometry for the small molecular at this site.<br />
Use the Molecular Interactions Wizard to lead your through this<br />
interaction.<br />
• Internet Helper Application - Use your browser to display molecules<br />
when they are downloaded to your machine.<br />
• Build, analyze, and modify chemical models<br />
• Energy Minimization - A technique of modifying molecular<br />
coordinates to obtain reasonable, low-energy molecular geometries<br />
• Fitting - A visual comparison of a series of molecules by matching<br />
atom pairs in a least-squares fitting routine. The molecular<br />
geometries are then compared to superimpose the structures.<br />
• Twisting - An interactive rotation of parts of a molecule about a bond<br />
to change its conformation <strong>with</strong> real-time display of distances and<br />
angles<br />
• Spacefilling - A depiction of molecular shape by models that display a<br />
molecule’s surface as defined by its atomic van der Waals radii<br />
• Ball and Stack Imaging - Depict a molecule as a sphere connected<br />
by a slender rod<br />
Contact Tripos, Inc. for additional information about ALCHEMY 2000.<br />
Tripos, Inc.<br />
1699 South Hanley Road<br />
St. Louis, MO 63144-2913<br />
Phone: 314-647-1099<br />
800-323-2960<br />
Internet: http://www.tripos.com/
B–2 ALCHEMY<br />
About<br />
CONCORD TM<br />
CONCORD. Developed by Robert S. Pearlman and associates at the<br />
University of Texas, is marketed by Tripos, Inc.<br />
CONCORD is a computer program for rapid, automatic generation of<br />
high-quality 3D molecular structures. It is capable of generating<br />
approximate structures for almost all compounds composed of the organic<br />
elements <strong>with</strong> connectivity between 1 and 4.<br />
CONCORD is not intended to provide realistic structures for large<br />
molecules <strong>with</strong> high potential flexibility. For example, octadecane or a<br />
polypeptide is created fully extended rather than in coiled conformations.<br />
Many CONCORD structures are visually indiscernible from structures<br />
optimized by Molecular Mechanics (MM) or Molecular Orbital (MO)<br />
energy.<br />
CONCORD structures are usually generated in 0.2 to 2 VAX 11/780 CPU<br />
seconds. Many energy minimizations take several minutes to several<br />
hours of CPU time. Thus, CONCORD represents a compromise between<br />
speed and accuracy. Studies indicate the loss in accuracy as very small.<br />
Diagnostics are provided for those exceptions.<br />
CONCORD structures serve as exceptionally good initial guesses for<br />
energy minimization procedures when your application demands such<br />
accuracy.<br />
Ring Systems<br />
A ring system is defined as a set of rings. Each ring in the set contains at<br />
least two atoms in common <strong>with</strong> another ring in the set. An analysis of<br />
each ring system determines the general conformation of each ring. The<br />
bond and torsion angles are determined by minimizing a strain function.<br />
CONCORD can construct mono- and polycyclic planar ring systems, as<br />
well as complex, nonplanar, heteroatomic, fused, bridged, spiro, and<br />
caged ring systems. A maximum of 200 heavy (non-hydrogen) atoms per<br />
molecule is permitted.<br />
The Mechanism<br />
of Transformation<br />
The CONCORD algorithm provides a mechanism for transforming the<br />
information contained in a molecule’s atomic CONnection table into the<br />
atom CoORDinates. Connection tables from the CAS REGISTRY File for<br />
organic substances <strong>with</strong>out stereochemistry and standard CAS bond<br />
conventions are provided to CONCORD.<br />
The resulting coordinates are available to download using <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
<strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!. Substances <strong>with</strong> more than one component or single atom<br />
fragments, polymers, coordination compounds, or incompletely defined<br />
substances are not processed.
ALCHEMY B–3<br />
Energy<br />
Configuration<br />
By default, CONCORD produces the lowest energy configuration. It is<br />
consistent <strong>with</strong> the connectivity and the stereochemistry of the structure.<br />
For example, methylcyclohexane and 2-butene are made in the lowenergy<br />
equatorial and E configurations, respectively. Coordinates are<br />
unavailable for stereo-specific substances. However, coordinates for<br />
chiral substances <strong>with</strong> no stereochemistry (NS) are specified. These<br />
substances are chiral in nature, but are referred to in literature as having<br />
no stereochemistry specifications.<br />
Structure-Building<br />
Algorithm<br />
CONCORD’s structure-building algorithm is an offspring of the expert and<br />
pseudo-molecular mechanics approaches. Decisions regarding bond and<br />
torsion angles are based on a set of rules that expert chemists apply. For<br />
example, methoxybenzne is made in the plane of a ring, whereas the<br />
methyl group in 2,6-dichloromethoxybenzene is oriented perpendicular to<br />
the plane of the ring.<br />
Other decisions are made through an optimization procedure to minimize<br />
the molecular mechanics energy function. Decisions regarding bond<br />
lengths are based on a table. A warning message is issued when an<br />
approximated bond length is used.<br />
Acyclic<br />
Substructures<br />
The geometry of acyclic substructures is determined by minimizing steric<br />
interactions. H-bonding and stereochemical specification calls are<br />
exceptions for higher energy isomeric forms.<br />
ALCHEMY<br />
MOL Files<br />
The 3D CONCORD structure downloaded from <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! is contained in an ALCHEMY MOL File. The MOL File contains<br />
a complete description of the molecule. The number of atoms, bonds, and<br />
charges, as well as the atom types, coordinates, and connectivities are<br />
listed. A comment is also included <strong>with</strong> CONCORD diagnostics, as well as<br />
the CAS Registry Number for the substance.<br />
A portion of an ALCHEMY MOL File may resemble the following:<br />
16 ATOMS, 15 BONDS<br />
1 C3 -0.4675 0.0282 0.0633<br />
2 C3 -1.0699 0.0751 -0.0501<br />
3 H -0.8919 0.9898 -0.2579<br />
The first line in the file represents the number of atoms and the number of<br />
bonds in the molecule.<br />
Next is a set of lines, one per atom, that provide the atom number, the<br />
atom label, and the x, y, and z coordinates of the atom, in angstroms. The<br />
atom number is not read by ALCHEMY. The atom label is four characters<br />
or fewer.
B–4 ALCHEMY<br />
The following list of atoms is the bond list, part of which is shown below.<br />
The first column in this table is the bond number. It is not readable by<br />
ALCHEMY. The next two numbers are the first and second atoms of the<br />
bond pair. The last column is a text field describing the bond value, e.g.,<br />
SINGLE, DOUBLE, TRIPLE, or AROMATIC.<br />
1 1 2 SINGLE<br />
2 1 3 SINGLE<br />
3 1 4 SINGLE<br />
4 1 5 SINGLE<br />
5 5 6 SINGLE<br />
The first line indicates that a single bond exists between the first and the<br />
second atoms in the previous atom list. The next three lines show that the<br />
first atom is also bonded to atoms 3, 4, and 5. The last line indicates that<br />
a single bond exists between atoms 5 and 6.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! may potentially add two more fields to the<br />
MOL File it creates, the CAS Registry Number and the CONCORD<br />
Diagnostic Message.<br />
The CAS Registry Number is considered an optional field. It is always<br />
present in files downloaded from <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
The CONCORD Diagnostic Message is also an optional field. Typically,<br />
these are not present. If it is present, the message “Warning Diagnostic<br />
generated by CONCORD” is displayed.<br />
ALCHEMY<br />
2000 and <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
ALCHEMY 2000 can be used in conjunction <strong>with</strong> <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>!. You can:<br />
1. Search structures created in ALCHEMY on <strong>STN</strong> by importing<br />
them into <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! and uploading to a<br />
structure-searchable file<br />
2. Download <strong>with</strong> <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! 3D CONCORD<br />
coordinates, generated by CONCORD, for over 6 million organic<br />
compounds from the CAS REGISTRY File for molecular modeling<br />
<strong>with</strong> ALCHEMY 2000<br />
For information about building ALCHEMY structures, refer to your<br />
ALCHEMY manual.
ALCHEMY B–5<br />
Searching for<br />
ALCHEMY<br />
Structures on<br />
<strong>STN</strong><br />
ALCHEMY structures are searched on <strong>STN</strong> as follows:<br />
1. Transfer a connection table for a structure search<br />
Select Prepare Structure Query from the Query menu or click the<br />
Prepare Query button if it is located on your Main Menu Toolbar.<br />
Depending on how you saved your ALCHEMY structure, change the<br />
Files of Type setting to Alchemy Molfile or MDL Molfile. Select a<br />
file and click Open.<br />
Each MOL File contains data, connection tables, and coordinates for<br />
a single substance. Refer to your ALCHEMY manual for information<br />
on using MOL Files.<br />
2. Edit the ALCHEMY structure in <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
Edit and modify the ALCHEMY structure that was imported to <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!. These structure types are edited and<br />
modified like any structure created on <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!.<br />
Refer to Chapter 6, Structure Queries, for more information.<br />
3. Upload ALCHEMY structures to <strong>STN</strong><br />
Upload the imported ALCHEMY structure from <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! to <strong>STN</strong> to search the <strong>STN</strong> structure files.<br />
Refer to Chapter 6, Structure Queries, for information on structure<br />
searching.
B–6 ALCHEMY<br />
Downloading<br />
Answers<br />
from <strong>STN</strong> for<br />
Molecular<br />
Modeling in<br />
ALCHEMY<br />
Search the REGISTRY File on <strong>STN</strong> to retrieve three-dimensional (3D)<br />
coordinate data for millions of organic compounds. The data are<br />
generated by CONCORD.<br />
Download 3D CONCORD data from <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! by using<br />
the search answers from the REGISTRY File or by providing Accession<br />
Numbers. In REGISTRY, the Accession Number is identical to the CAS<br />
Registry Number. Type HELP ACC at an arrow prompt (=>) for<br />
information about Accession Numbers in the REGISTRY File or refer to<br />
the REGISTRY File Database Summary Sheet for overall file information.<br />
Download connection tables for substances that have 3D CONCORD in<br />
the REGISTRY File’s<br />
File Segment (/FS) search field. Use CONCORD/FS to limit your answers<br />
to those containing CONCORD data. You may download to a local PC or<br />
to a terminal by typing DOWNLOAD ALCHEMY at an arrow prompt (=>).<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! executes Kermit to process<br />
the file transfer. Choose a file name <strong>with</strong> a .mol extension.<br />
For example, inititate the following search in the REGISTRY File:<br />
=> S ATROPIN? AND CONCORD/FS<br />
336 ATROPIN?<br />
5469078 CONCORD/FS<br />
L1 19 ATROPIN? AND CONCORD/FS<br />
=> D<br />
L1 ANSWER 1 OF 19 REGISTRY COPYRIGHT 1996 ACS<br />
RN 114473-22-2 REGISTRY<br />
CN Benzeneacetic acid, .alpha.-chloro-, 2-oxo-1-phenyl-2-[(1,2,2,6-<br />
tetramethyl-4-piperidinyl)oxy]ethyl ester (9CI) (CA INDEX NAME)<br />
OTHER NAMES:<br />
CN Eucatropine .alpha. -chlorophenylacetate<br />
FS 3D CONCORD<br />
MF C25 H30 Cl N O4<br />
SR CA<br />
LC <strong>STN</strong> Files: CA, CAPLUS, TOXLIT, USPATFULL<br />
1 REFERENCES IN FILE CA (1967 TO DATE)<br />
1 REFERENCES IN FILE CAPLUS (1967 TO DATE)<br />
=> DOWNLOAD ALCHEMY<br />
ENTER (L1), L#, ACC OR ?:L1<br />
ENTER ANSWER NUMBER OR RANGE (1):1<br />
ENTER HIGHLIGHT OR NOHIGHLIGHT:HIGHLIGHT<br />
ENTER FILENAME OR (?):ATROPINE.MOL<br />
TEXT DATA WILL BE DOWNLOADED TO ‘ATROPINE.MOL’ USING ‘CAPTURE’<br />
START DOWNLOAD (Y):Y
Appendix<br />
C<br />
Script Language<br />
Script Language C–1<br />
A script is a text file that contains a set of statements in the Script<br />
Language that are executed by <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! The <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! Script Language can be used to create:<br />
• custom logon procedures<br />
• custom search strategies<br />
• procedures to automate repetitive search or display tasks.<br />
For example, you may routinely perform a certain subject or author<br />
search on <strong>STN</strong>. Rather than logging on to <strong>STN</strong> and opening a transcript<br />
file to capture search results, searching multiple files, and then logging off<br />
and reviewing the transcript, you can use scripts to streamline the<br />
process. One script can log you on to <strong>STN</strong>, another can initiate the<br />
searches, and another script can display your answers. Alternatively, one<br />
script can perform all three tasks. Because the script runs automatically,<br />
<strong>with</strong>out waiting for you to type, you may reduce your online time and<br />
costs.<br />
Steps in<br />
Writing and<br />
Running a<br />
Script<br />
Defining the Task<br />
Define what you want to accomplish and the steps required to accomplish<br />
the task. For example, suppose you have a list of CAS Registry Numbers<br />
(RN) and want to display their records on <strong>STN</strong>. What steps would you<br />
follow?<br />
1. Log on to <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
2. Enter the Registry file.<br />
3. Display the record for the first RN.<br />
4. Repeat step 3 until finished.<br />
5. Log off <strong>STN</strong>.
C–2 Script Language<br />
Translating the<br />
Task into Script<br />
Statements<br />
After you have defined the task, translate the steps into Script Language<br />
statements that will accomplish the task. (The statements are listed in<br />
detail later in this Appendix.)<br />
1. Log on to <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
The script could log on to <strong>STN</strong>, but it is often better to separate the<br />
logon task from the job the script performs. In this example, log on to<br />
<strong>STN</strong> as usual and then run the script.<br />
2. Enter the Registry file.<br />
The <strong>STN</strong> command to enter the Registry file is FILE REGISTRY. To<br />
use an <strong>STN</strong> command in a script, use the => (arrow prompt)<br />
statement:<br />
=> FILE REGISTRY<br />
3. Display the record for the first Registry Number.<br />
To display a record on <strong>STN</strong>, use the DISPLAY command. Again we<br />
use the => statement:<br />
=> DIS 50-00-0<br />
4. Repeat step 3 until finished.<br />
Add more DIS commands<br />
5. Log off <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
End your <strong>STN</strong> session <strong>with</strong> the LOGOFF command, again using the<br />
=> statement:<br />
=> LOG Y<br />
Creating a script<br />
To create a script, select Prepare Command File from the Query menu<br />
on the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Main Menu. Click New in the Open Script dialog.<br />
This opens the <strong>STN</strong>Edit window <strong>with</strong> an Untitled text window inside it.<br />
Type the following script statements:<br />
\* Display CAS RNs in the Registry file on <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
=> FILE REGISTRY<br />
=> DIS 50-00-0<br />
=> DIS 7777-77-7<br />
=> LOG Y
Script Language C–3<br />
Saving the Script<br />
To save the script file, select Save from the File menu. Type a name in<br />
the File name box and click Save. By default, the script file is saved to the<br />
<strong>User</strong> Scripts folder defined in General Preferences in the Setup menu<br />
(on the Main Menu Toolbar). Refer to Appendix A for information about<br />
General Preferences.<br />
Do not use any name that exists in the Predefined Scripts folder unless<br />
you are replacing the functions of that script.<br />
Checking the<br />
Script for Errors<br />
To check the script for syntax errors, go to the Utilities menu in <strong>STN</strong>Edit<br />
and select Check Command File. If errors are found, <strong>STN</strong>Edit highlights<br />
appropriate script lines and displays a message at the bottom of the<br />
<strong>STN</strong>Edit window. To learn the nature of the error, move the mouse pointer<br />
over the highlighted part of a line. Correct the error, save the script, and<br />
check the script again until no errors are found.<br />
Check Command File does not find all errors because some errors<br />
cannot be found until the script actually runs.<br />
It is not necessary to be logged on to an online host to use Check<br />
Command File.<br />
Using or Running<br />
the Script<br />
While you are logged on to <strong>STN</strong>, Select Run Command File from the<br />
Query menu. A Command File dialog box is displayed. Select a script<br />
file to run and then click Open. The script runs until it finishes or until an<br />
error is found in the script.<br />
You may use your own word processor to write a script as long as you<br />
save the file in a text-only format.<br />
Statements may be entered in upper- or lower-case.<br />
A line in a script is limited to 80 characters. However, <strong>STN</strong> commands<br />
can be up to 256 characters in length. To continue a statement on the<br />
next line, put a backslash, \, at the end of each line that is continued on<br />
the next line. A single script statement can be 140 characters long.<br />
Scripts do not require an exact format style as you type in the statements.<br />
However, each statement MUST be entered on a new line. It is<br />
recommended that you use the style that is shown throughout this<br />
appendix.<br />
Follow the steps below to begin writing a script. More advanced script<br />
examples are included after this section.<br />
To ensure that all <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> features are available while you are online,<br />
use the <strong>STN</strong>LOGON script instead of writing your own commands to logon<br />
to <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
Open a new script file by selecting New from the File menu <strong>with</strong>in the<br />
<strong>STN</strong>Edit window. A new, untitled window is displayed.
C–4 Script Language<br />
Script<br />
Language<br />
Components<br />
The <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! Script Language is a miniature<br />
computer programming language. As such, it has many of the same<br />
components as other programming languages. The components of the<br />
Script Language include:<br />
• Variables - Temporary storage places for data, or places to<br />
store data that can change<br />
• Character Strings and Numbers – Constant, literal text and<br />
numeric data<br />
• File names - Names of transcript or data files on your PC<br />
• Labels - Identifiers for statements<br />
• Statements - Instructions to <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! that<br />
perform an action. For example, the SEND statement instructs<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! to send a string of characters to an<br />
online host or communications device.<br />
• Operators and Conditions – Elements that manipulate and<br />
compare pieces of data<br />
• Syntax requirements - Rules for organizing scripts and typing<br />
statements<br />
Variables<br />
A variable is a name for a place to store information. Specifically, a<br />
variable can store a number, a string of characters, a file name, or the<br />
result of a search. Use a variable when a specific value is unknown or<br />
will change <strong>with</strong>in a script. For example, if you write a script that<br />
performs an author search, make the script flexible by using a variable<br />
for the author’s name instead of typing the author’s name in the script.<br />
Variables are named <strong>with</strong> an underscore followed by one to twelve<br />
alphanumeric characters. They are considered “declared” after their<br />
first use. Once a variable is declared, the same name may not be used<br />
to refer to another variable.<br />
Variables are always considered to be of type string (text), except for<br />
variables that represent search results (L-numbers). Variables are<br />
automatically converted to numbers (integers) when necessary for<br />
arithmetic operations or conditions. Attempts to perform arithmetic<br />
operations on non-numeric text result in errors when the script is run.<br />
To give a variable a value, use an assignment statement, described<br />
below, or the \> operator, described at the => statement. See also the #<br />
operator, explained under the => statement.<br />
Up to 200 variables are permitted <strong>with</strong>in a script. If there are more<br />
variables, this is noted when you run the script online rather than when<br />
you use Check Command File.<br />
Variable values may not exceed 255 characters in length.
Script Language C–5<br />
Character Strings<br />
Textual data is enclosed in double quotes and can be a string up to 140<br />
characters long.<br />
You may continue a string on a new line by typing a backslash, \, at the<br />
end of the line.<br />
To use the value of a string variable, type the variable along <strong>with</strong> the text.<br />
Place double quotes around the entire string.<br />
For example:<br />
_s = ”how to use”<br />
ECHO ”This is _s a variable in a string.”<br />
displays:<br />
This is how to use a variable in a string.<br />
Variables <strong>with</strong>in strings are replaced by their values, converting integers to<br />
text. The # operator, along <strong>with</strong> a variable, is replaced by the number of<br />
answers in the answer set and is converted to text.<br />
If you want a variable <strong>with</strong>in a string to be immediately followed by nonblank<br />
text, separate the variable name and text <strong>with</strong> a period.<br />
For example,<br />
_variable = ”con”<br />
ECHO ”This example string includes<br />
_variable.catenated text”<br />
displays:<br />
This example string includes concatenated text<br />
Special characters and escape characters <strong>with</strong>in strings include:<br />
[CR]<br />
[TAB]<br />
[BS]<br />
[ESC]<br />
[BELL]<br />
[CTRL-A]...[CTRL-Z]<br />
[FF]<br />
Carriage return<br />
Move to next tab position<br />
Backspace<br />
Escape<br />
Sound bell (beep)<br />
Unprintable control characters<br />
Formfeed<br />
Note that many networks and <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! use control<br />
characters in normal operations. As a result, indiscriminate use of control<br />
characters may result in lost data, locked sessions, or terminated<br />
processes.
C–6 Script Language<br />
The characters, _, \, ”, [, and #, have special use <strong>with</strong>in the script<br />
language and must be doubled if they are to be used <strong>with</strong>in a string.<br />
In other words, to include a [ in a string, use two in a row:<br />
ECHO ”Here is a string <strong>with</strong> a left bracket\<br />
(i.e., [[) in it.”<br />
displays<br />
Here is a string <strong>with</strong> a left bracket (i.e., [) in it.<br />
A distinction between upper- and lower-case is made when the<br />
characters are <strong>with</strong>in a string and the number of spaces between words<br />
and letters is not ignored.<br />
Numbers<br />
The Script Language supports integers; there are no decimals or<br />
fractions. Type whole numbers in an ordinary way. For example<br />
_var = 42<br />
IF _var < 100 THEN<br />
To use a negative number, subtract a positive number from zero:<br />
_neg = -1 \* not allowed<br />
_neg = 0 – 1<br />
IF _neg < 0 THEN<br />
File Names<br />
Enclose file names <strong>with</strong>in angle brackets, < >. All characters <strong>with</strong>in the<br />
brackets are taken literally, but underscore characters are not allowed.<br />
File names may be included <strong>with</strong> variables.<br />
For example,<br />
CAPTURE ON \* a literal file name<br />
_var = \* assign a file name<br />
\* to a variable<br />
EXEC _var \* execute a script<br />
\* whose name is in _var<br />
CAPTURE OFF <br />
Labels<br />
A label or statement label identifies a line in a script so that other<br />
statements can refer to that line. Labels are named similarly to variables<br />
except that they begin <strong>with</strong> the @ character. The following are examples<br />
of valid labels:<br />
@start<br />
@error<br />
Refer to the CONTINUE, GOTO, GOSUB statements for examples of how<br />
to use labels.
Script Language C–7<br />
Statements<br />
and Control<br />
Constructs<br />
The Script Language is composed of keywords and values. Keywords<br />
are words that have special meaning in the Script Language. Values are<br />
pieces of data in the form of variables, strings, numbers, or file names. A<br />
statement has at least one keyword, and some statements have<br />
parameters. A parameter is the object of the statement and may be a<br />
keyword, a value or a combination of keywords and values. You can<br />
sometimes think of statements as having verbs and objects. For example,<br />
in the statement GET _author, GET is the verb and _author is the object<br />
(parameter).<br />
The conventions used to describe the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! Script<br />
Language are:<br />
1. Keywords are shown in upper-case letters, e.g., EXIT.<br />
2. Strings are shown in lower-case letters inside double quotation<br />
marks. For example, in the statement SEND ”string”, SEND is a<br />
keyword, and string is a string value. You may use a variable<br />
wherever you can use a string.<br />
3. Variables are shown in lower-case letters <strong>with</strong> a preceding<br />
underscore. For example, in GET _var1, GET is a keyword, and<br />
_var1 represents the name of a variable.<br />
4. Numbers are denoted by lower case letters or words. For example, in<br />
the statement PAUSE n n represents a number.<br />
3. Optional parameters are shown inside square brackets. For example,<br />
PAUSE n [SECONDS] means the PAUSE statement has a required<br />
parameter n, and an optional keyword, SECONDS. Do not type the<br />
brackets when you type the parameter or keyword.<br />
4. When there is a choice of parameters or values, the choice are<br />
enclosed in braces, and a vertical bar separates the choices. For<br />
example, in the statement CAPTURE {ON | OFF}, the keyword ON or<br />
the keyword OFF follows the CAPTURE keyword.<br />
5. File names are shown <strong>with</strong>in angle brackets, DELETE .<br />
You may use a variable whose value is a file name wherever you can<br />
use a file name.<br />
7. Comments are preceded by \* and continue through the ends of their<br />
lines. The script processor ignores comments.<br />
The statements in the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! Script Language are<br />
listed in alphabetical order.
C–8 Script Language<br />
Make sure you review the common statements, i.e., SEND, WAIT, =>, :,<br />
ECHO, IF, GOTO, and EXIT.<br />
=><br />
:<br />
=> [host-command] [\!] [\> _var] (primary prompt statement)<br />
: [<strong>STN</strong>-reply] [\!] [\> _var] (<strong>STN</strong> secondary prompt statement)<br />
The => and : statements are shortcuts for a WAIT/SEND combination.<br />
The => command waits for a primary or level 1 prompt, “=>” on <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
The : command waits for a secondary or level 2 prompt, “:” on <strong>STN</strong>. For<br />
example,<br />
=> del history \* Send a delete history<br />
\* command<br />
: y \* and reply to the secondary<br />
\* prompt.<br />
is equivalent to<br />
SEND ”” \* Cause an arrow prompt.<br />
WAIT<br />
FOR ”=>” \* Wait for the arrow prompt<br />
SEND ”del history” \* and send a delete command.<br />
WAIT<br />
FOR ”:” \* Wait for the confirmation<br />
\* question<br />
SEND ”y” \* and reply.<br />
In each case, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> waits to receive a command prompt from<br />
<strong>STN</strong>. After receiving the arrow prompt, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> sends a delete<br />
history command and then waits for a secondary prompt from <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> responds <strong>with</strong> “DELETE ALL L# ITEMS? (Y)/N:” which <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> recognizes as a level 2 prompt<br />
The => command works for online hosts other than <strong>STN</strong>. The : command<br />
is for <strong>STN</strong> only.<br />
Use the \! option if you want to edit the host command before it is sent<br />
(see also the EDIT statement).<br />
Use the \> operator to assign the L-number result of the command to a<br />
variable. For example, suppose the search command in the following<br />
statement produces L2 and 1492 answers:<br />
=> s acid cow \> _lnum<br />
The value of _lnum will be “L2”. Furthermore, the # operator can be used<br />
<strong>with</strong> _lnum to retrieve the number of answers in an L-number. The<br />
statement<br />
ECHO ”_lnum contains #_lnum answers.”<br />
displays<br />
L2 contains 1492 answers.
Script Language C–9<br />
Assignment<br />
Statement<br />
_var = expression<br />
Use an assignment statement to assign a value to a variable. First type the<br />
name of the variable, then an equal sign (assignment operator), and an<br />
expression. An expression can be a variable, a string, a number, a file<br />
name, an arithmetic expression, or a function. For example<br />
_count = 0<br />
_count = _count + 1<br />
_author = ”dittmar, p”<br />
_filename = <br />
BEGIN/END<br />
BEGIN/END<br />
BEGIN/END forms a block of statements that are treated as a group.<br />
A BEGIN/END block usually follows an IF or ONEXIT statement.<br />
To use this statement, type BEGIN before the statements you want<br />
grouped together. Type END after the statement group.<br />
For example,<br />
IF (_status = ”NOT CONNECTED”)<br />
BEGIN<br />
ECHO ”DIALING...”<br />
SEND ”ATDT 555-5555”<br />
WAIT<br />
FOR ”CONNECT” CONTINUE<br />
FOR 5 SECONDS EXIT<br />
ECHO ”CONNECTED!”<br />
END<br />
This example executes every line between BEGIN and END only if the<br />
value of _status is “NOT CONNECTED”. Otherwise, the script continues<br />
after the END statement.<br />
BREAK<br />
BREAK [n [MILSEC[S]]]<br />
The BREAK statement sends a break to the host system. Enter the<br />
number, n, as either a variable or an integer. If x is not entered, 750 is the<br />
assumed value.<br />
For example,<br />
BREAK 500<br />
sends a break 500 milliseconds in duration.
C–10 Script Language<br />
CAPTURE<br />
CAPTURE {ON | OFF} <br />
The CAPTURE statement turns on or off the capturing of your online<br />
session. /A opens the file name in append mode.<br />
Entering a file name is optional. If you do not enter a file name, you<br />
must still type . Typing CAPTURE ON prompts you to enter the<br />
transcript file name.<br />
Typing CAPTURE OFF assumes that you want the currently opened<br />
transcript file closed.<br />
For example,<br />
CAPTURE ON <br />
ECHO ”THIS LINE OF TEXT”<br />
CAPTURE OFF <br />
results in the line “This LINE OF TEXT” being placed in a file named<br />
tranfile in the Transcripts folder defined in your General Preferences.<br />
If the file exists, you may opt to append the file by clicking Append.<br />
Click the Save button to replace the file.<br />
Once the file is open, the output from your session up to the CAPTURE<br />
OFF statement, is placed in the transcript file. Capturing is turned off<br />
when <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! receives the CAPTURE OFF <br />
statement.<br />
If an error occurs, the _$filerror system variable is non-zero.<br />
CLOSE<br />
CLOSE<br />
The CLOSE statement closes the currently open file.<br />
For example,<br />
CLOSE<br />
closes the data file that was opened by the OPEN statement.<br />
If an error occurs at the end of the file, the _$filerror system variable is<br />
non-zero.
Script Language C–11<br />
CONTINUE<br />
CONTINUE<br />
The CONTINUE statement is used to continue processing a script beyond<br />
the current SEND, WAIT FOR, and TRYAGAIN statements.<br />
For example,<br />
SEND ”X”<br />
WAIT<br />
FOR ”LOGINID” CONTINUE<br />
FOR 20 SECONDS GOTO @ERR<br />
SEND _loginid<br />
If “LOGINID” is received from the host, the script continues at the SEND<br />
statement.<br />
DELETE<br />
DELETE <br />
The DELETE statement deletes a specific file.<br />
For example,<br />
_filename = <br />
DELETE _filename<br />
deletes the file named OLDFILE.txt.<br />
If an error occurs, the _$filerror system variable is non-zero.<br />
DROP DTR<br />
DROP DTR<br />
The DROP DTR statement is used to set the DTR (Data Terminal Ready)<br />
circuit to an “off” state. In some rare situations, you may need to control<br />
the DTR setting on your modem. See also RAISE DTR.<br />
ECHO<br />
ECHO “string” [NOCR]<br />
The ECHO statement is used to display a character string or variable on<br />
the screen. The “string” can be zero or more characters, variables, or<br />
both.<br />
For example,<br />
_var = ”example”<br />
_item = ”ECHO statement.”<br />
ECHO ”This is an _var of the ” NOCR<br />
ECHO _item<br />
displays “This is an example of the ECHO statement” on your screen.<br />
A carriage return automatically occurs after this statement. To suppress it,<br />
use the NOCR keyword.
C–12 Script Language<br />
When you use the ECHO statement in conjunction <strong>with</strong> the GET<br />
statement, echo a blank line first (carriage return only). Then ECHO a<br />
prompt or message.<br />
For example,<br />
ECHO ”” \*outputs a blank line to the screen<br />
ECHO ”Enter your Password:”<br />
GET _password HIDDEN<br />
EDIT<br />
EDIT {ON | OFF}<br />
The EDIT statement is used to interact <strong>with</strong> the script processor by<br />
pausing the script after each line is sent and displaying a text editing box<br />
that allows you to modify the next line before it is processed. The<br />
changes made in the text editing box are not saved in the script file. The<br />
default is EDIT OFF.<br />
For example,<br />
=> FILE CAPLUS \* This line is sent as typed<br />
EDIT ON<br />
=> S ASPIRIN \* This line can be modified<br />
\* before it is sent<br />
EDIT OFF<br />
=> D 1-3 ALL \* This line is sent as-is<br />
You may use \! as a shortcut for the EDIT statement. Use \! on the =><br />
and : statement lines for <strong>STN</strong> scripts. This shortcut must occur at the<br />
end of a line.<br />
EXEC<br />
EXEC <br />
The EXEC statement is used to execute another script from <strong>with</strong>in a<br />
script. The script file name is required.<br />
Scripts may be executed eight levels deep. Variables defined in the<br />
calling script are also available for the called script. When the called<br />
script completes, processing continues on the line immediately after the<br />
EXEC statement in the calling script.<br />
For example,<br />
_filevar = <br />
EXEC _filevar<br />
ECHO ”_filevar has completed processing.”<br />
executes the script SECOND SCRIPT. Then it returns to the calling<br />
script and prints:<br />
SECOND SCRIPT has completed processing.
Script Language C–13<br />
All scripts that are executed must reside in the <strong>User</strong> Scripts or<br />
Predefined Scripts folder as defined in General Preferences (located in<br />
the Setup menu on the Main Menu bar). The <strong>User</strong> Scripts folder is<br />
checked first for the script. If it is not found, the Predefined Scripts folder<br />
is checked. If the script is not found in either folder, an error message is<br />
displayed. If an error occurs, the _$filerror system variable is non-zero.<br />
EXISTS<br />
EXISTS <br />
The EXISTS statement tests for the existence of a file, first in the <strong>User</strong><br />
Scripts and then in the Scripts folder. It sets _$filerror to zero of the file<br />
exists and to a nonzero value if the file does not exist.<br />
EXIT<br />
EXIT<br />
The EXIT statement defines a point to leave the script.<br />
EXIT has no parameters. An exit is assumed after the last statement in a<br />
script. Thus, an EXIT statement is not required in any script. More than<br />
one EXIT statement may be used in a script. If an ONEXIT statement<br />
exists in a script, the ONEXIT block is executed before exiting. If the<br />
ONEXIT statement includes an EXIT statement, an exit occurs immediately<br />
when that exit is executed.<br />
GET<br />
GET _varname [HIDDEN]<br />
The GET statement is used to accept input from the keyboard to use in a<br />
script.<br />
When a GET statement is reached in the script, processing is transferred<br />
to the user. A text entry box is displayed in which the user may type a<br />
line. Typed items, up to but not including the first carriage return, are<br />
placed in _varname. The script then continues at the next statement.<br />
All input lines are scanned for a colon (:). If found, GET returns only the<br />
characters that follow the colon.<br />
If the HIDDEN option is present, the typed characters are not displayed<br />
on the screen.<br />
For example,<br />
ECHO ”Please enter your password:”<br />
GET _passwd HIDDEN<br />
prompts you for your password. When your password is entered, it is<br />
processed but not displayed.
C–14 Script Language<br />
GOSUB<br />
GOSUB @LABEL<br />
The GOSUB statement is used to branch to a different location in the<br />
script <strong>with</strong> the option of returning to the statement after GOSUB.<br />
This statement is useful when an identical set of statements is executed<br />
from various points in the script.<br />
GOSUB has only one parameter, a label of a set of statements that may<br />
reside outside of the normal flow of the script. When GOSUB is<br />
reached, processing moves to the indicated label and continues<br />
processing until a RETURN statement is reached. The RETURN<br />
statement causes processing to continue <strong>with</strong> the statement following the<br />
GOSUB statement.<br />
GOSUBs may be nested up to eight levels.<br />
For example,<br />
ECHO ”Right before the GOSUB.”<br />
GOSUB @SUBROUTINE<br />
ECHO ”Right after the GOSUB.”<br />
EXIT<br />
@SUBROUTINE<br />
ECHO ”Within the GOSUB.”<br />
RETURN<br />
displays<br />
Right before the GOSUB.<br />
Within the GOSUB.<br />
Right after the GOSUB.<br />
GOTO<br />
GOTO @LABEL<br />
The GOTO statement is used to continue processing at a line that is not<br />
directly after the current line of a script. This statement is useful to<br />
redirect processing.<br />
GOTO is similar to GOSUB except that there is no option to RETURN<br />
unless it is initiated <strong>with</strong> another GOTO.<br />
For example,<br />
IF (_var1 = ”FIRST”) GOTO @LABEL1<br />
ECHO ”Value of var1 is not FIRST.”<br />
EXIT<br />
@LABEL1<br />
ECHO ”Value of var1 is FIRST”<br />
EXIT<br />
outputs only one of the above ECHOed lines before exiting depending on<br />
the value of _var1.
Script Language C–15<br />
IF<br />
IF (condition) block [ELSE block]<br />
The IF statement is used to execute one or more statements based on a<br />
certain condition. Conditions are defined later in this Appendix.<br />
The IF/ELSE statement forms a construct that decides which statement to<br />
execute next. If the condition is true, the statements directly following the<br />
IF are executed. If the condition is false, the statements directly following<br />
the ELSE are executed.<br />
For example,<br />
IF (_phoneno = ””)<br />
BEGIN<br />
ECHO ”Enter phone number:”<br />
GET _phoneno<br />
END<br />
ELSE<br />
echo ”Dialing...”<br />
\* if no telephone number was<br />
\* given<br />
\* else phone number exists<br />
SEND ”ATDT _phoneno”<br />
\* single statement as a block<br />
Note that the SEND statement is outside of the IF/ELSE construct. It is<br />
executed regardless of the condition.<br />
ONEXIT<br />
ONEXIT block<br />
ONEXIT is used to specify a set of statements to execute before leaving a<br />
script.<br />
The ONEXIT statement may be placed anywhere <strong>with</strong>in a script. It cannot<br />
contain a GOTO or RETURN statement. An EXIT statement <strong>with</strong>in an<br />
ONEXIT block signifies an EXIT when the EXIT statement is reached.<br />
Statements following the EXIT statement in the ONEXIT block are ignored.<br />
The block portion of the statement may be entered as one line, or as a set<br />
of statements between BEGIN and END.<br />
For example, the statements<br />
ONEXIT<br />
BEGIN<br />
ECHO ”These two lines will always be”<br />
ECHO ”executed upon exiting the script.”<br />
END<br />
cause the two lines to be displayed to the screen when you leave the<br />
script.
C–16 Script Language<br />
OPEN<br />
OPEN [ {/R | /W} ]<br />
The OPEN statement is used to open a new or existing file from <strong>with</strong>in a<br />
script.<br />
Entering the file names is optional. If no file name is supplied, you are<br />
prompted to enter one. The /R option opens the file to read only. The<br />
/W option allows both reading and writing in the file. The default option<br />
is /W.<br />
For example,<br />
_error = ”Command timed out. Error ##36.”<br />
DELETE <br />
OPEN <br />
WRITE _error<br />
CLOSE<br />
places the following message in a file named “ERROR FILE”:<br />
Command timed out. Error #36.<br />
If an error occurs, the _$filerror system variable is non-zero.<br />
PAGE<br />
PAGE<br />
The PAGE statement forces output to a new page when printing.<br />
PAGE is issued <strong>with</strong> no parameters and causes output from a captured<br />
file to begin at the start of a new page. The statement places a [CTRL]-L<br />
in the file. This is the control character sequence to start a new page.<br />
PAUSE<br />
PAUSE {n [SECOND[S]] | [UNTIL time]}<br />
The PAUSE is used to halt script processing for a specific time.<br />
Enter the number of seconds, n, as an integer or a value <strong>with</strong>in a<br />
variable. If n equals zero, the pause is forever.<br />
The UNTIL time option allows you to specify a certain time of the day,<br />
using a 24-hour clock.<br />
For example,<br />
PAUSE 1 SECOND<br />
PAUSE UNTIL 14:45<br />
\* pause for 1 second<br />
\* pause until 2:45 pm<br />
PRINT<br />
PRINT {ON | OFF}<br />
Use the PRINT statement to turn “slave” printing on or off. Slave printing<br />
causes the transcript to be printed as the online session progresses.<br />
Slave printing is not recommended.
Script Language C–17<br />
RAISE DTR<br />
RAISE DTR<br />
Use the RAISE DTR statement to set the DTR (Data Terminal Ready)<br />
circuit to an “on” state. See also DROP DTR.<br />
READ<br />
READ _varname<br />
The READ statement reads a single line from the OPEN file and stores the<br />
value, <strong>with</strong>out a carriage return character, in _varname.<br />
For example,<br />
ECHO ”reading first line of INPUT FILE”<br />
OPEN <br />
READ _line<br />
CLOSE<br />
The cursor remains on the same line. The INPUT FILE is opened and the<br />
first line is read into the variable _line.<br />
If an error occurs, the _$filerror system variable will be non-zero.<br />
RETURN<br />
RETURN<br />
The RETURN statement is used to return the script processing to a saved<br />
point in your script. This is usually after a GOSUB statement.<br />
For example,<br />
GOSUB @SUBROUTINE<br />
ECHO ”processing will return to this point.”<br />
EXIT<br />
@SUBROUTINE<br />
ECHO ”After printing this line...”<br />
RETURN<br />
displays the following:<br />
After printing this line...<br />
processing will return to this point.<br />
SEND<br />
SEND ”string” [EDIT] [HIDDEN] [NOCR]<br />
The SEND statement is used to send a string to the online host.<br />
(Technically, the string is sent to the communication port specified in the<br />
logon setup. Therefore, for example, a string can be sent to a modem<br />
before <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> is connected to the host.)<br />
The “string” and other parameters may occur in any order after the SEND<br />
statement. The “=>” and “:” statements are specific forms of the SEND<br />
statement that are described earlier in this section.
C–18 Script Language<br />
EDIT is an option that allows the string to be edited before it is sent.<br />
EDIT works as \! does in the => and : statements.<br />
HIDDEN does not display the string as it is sent. This is useful when<br />
sending passwords.<br />
A carriage return is automatically included after the string. To suppress<br />
it, use the NOCR keyword.<br />
For example,<br />
SEND ”+++” NOCR<br />
SEND ”ATDT 555-1212”<br />
sends:<br />
+++ATDT 555-1212<br />
to the modem.<br />
<strong>STN</strong>LOGON<br />
<strong>STN</strong>LOGON<br />
The <strong>STN</strong>LOGON statement is used to execute the <strong>STN</strong>LOGON script that<br />
logs you on to <strong>STN</strong> <strong>International</strong>. <strong>STN</strong>LOGON assumes that there is<br />
already a connection to <strong>STN</strong>. Specifically, <strong>STN</strong>LOGON sends a carriage<br />
return and expects the reply to be “Welcome to <strong>STN</strong> <strong>International</strong>! Enter<br />
x:” message is displayed.)<br />
SUBSTR<br />
SUBSTR (_var, begin, length)<br />
SUBSTR is more of a function than a statement. SUBSTR takes a string<br />
of characters and finds a substring. This statement takes on the value of<br />
a string. The value is a portion of the string _var. It begins <strong>with</strong><br />
character number begin and continues for a length characters. “begin”<br />
and “length” must be numeric constants.<br />
For example the statements<br />
_var1 = ”xxx remove this portion xxx”<br />
_var2 = SUBSTR(_var1,5,19)<br />
ECHO _var2<br />
display the following contents of _var2:<br />
remove this portion<br />
SUBSTR may be used in conditions. For example,<br />
IF (SUBSTR(_var1,1,3) = ”xxx”) GOTO @label
Script Language C–19<br />
TRYAGAIN<br />
TRYAGAIN n [TIMES] [ [THEN] block]<br />
The TRYAGAIN statement is used to repeat the previous SEND statement<br />
a specified number of times.<br />
This statement works only in the context of the WAIT-SEND statement pair.<br />
It repeats the previous SEND up to n times. After the nth attempt,<br />
processing either performs the THEN block or EXITs.<br />
For example,<br />
SEND ”ATDT 555-1212”<br />
WAIT<br />
FOR ”CONNECT” CONTINUE<br />
FOR ”NO CARRIER” EXIT<br />
FOR 5 SECONDS TRYAGAIN 5 TIMES THEN GOTO @LABEL<br />
This sends the phone number and waits 5 seconds for either CONNECT<br />
or NO CARRIER. If the response is not received, the phone number is<br />
sent up to four more times. If the response is still not received, the<br />
process jumps to the @LABEL label.<br />
UPLOAD<br />
UPLOAD [LNUM _var1,_var2,_var3...] <br />
The UPLOAD statement is used to upload a structure query to <strong>STN</strong>. The<br />
result of the UPLOAD on <strong>STN</strong> is one or more L-numbered queries.<br />
The LNUM keyword indicates the beginning of a list of variables. The<br />
variables are assigned the L-number or L-numbers of the uploaded<br />
structure. Usually, only one variable is needed. Multiple variables are<br />
needed when a reaction query <strong>with</strong> multiple participants is uploaded in an<br />
<strong>STN</strong> file that does not support reaction searching. In that situation, each of<br />
the participants is uploaded into its own L-numbered query. Commas must<br />
separate variables in the list.<br />
For example:<br />
UPLOAD LNUM _line1 <br />
This statement uploads the structure query file STR1.STR to <strong>STN</strong> and<br />
store the resulting L-number value in the _line1 variable.<br />
The file name to upload should be preceded by a space. It is the name of<br />
a chemical structure file created Structure Drawing.<br />
If an error occurs, the _$filerror system variable is non-zero.
C–20 Script Language<br />
USER<br />
USER<br />
The USER statement is used to temporarily halt script processing.<br />
Control is turned over to the user. This statement lets you place specific<br />
breaks in a script where you want to take control of the online session.<br />
Control is returned to the script when you press the END key.<br />
VT320<br />
VT320 {ON | OFF}<br />
The VT320 statement is used to turn ON or OFF VT320 terminal<br />
emulation and is useful when you connect to <strong>STN</strong> via a VAX <strong>with</strong> a menu<br />
system and when you connect to an online host that offers a menu<br />
system.<br />
WAIT<br />
WAIT [_var1] [LNUM _var2] for-list<br />
The WAIT statement is used to pause script processing until a specific<br />
response is received from the online host. This statement results in data<br />
being read from the incoming communication port one line at a time. A<br />
line includes everything up to a carriage return.<br />
_var1 contains the last line received from the host.<br />
LNUM _var2 puts an L-number into the variable _var2.<br />
for-list is one or more:<br />
FOR FORcond [THEN] block<br />
This is defined as: “If the FORcond is met, then execute these<br />
statements.”<br />
The block is optional, except for the last FORcondition. Often the block<br />
contains a CONTINUE statement.<br />
For example, FORcond is either:<br />
“string”<br />
(substring received from host)<br />
or:<br />
n [SECOND[S]] (passing of time, n, can be an integer or a<br />
variable)<br />
If n is zero, the WAIT is forever.<br />
WRITE<br />
WRITE ”string” [NOCR]<br />
The WRITE statement is writes a line of text in the currently open file.<br />
WRITE places the “string” in the open file, followed by a carriage return.<br />
If NOCR is present, the carriage return is suppressed. Lines are always<br />
written to the end of the file. To erase the contents of the file before<br />
writing to it, use the DELETE statement.<br />
If an error occurs, the _$filerror system variable is non-zero.
Script Language C–21<br />
Operators and<br />
Conditions<br />
Operators and conditions are components of statements. Arithmetic<br />
operators manipulate the values of numbers. String operators work on text<br />
strings. Conditional operators compare the values of strings and numbers<br />
in IF statements. Special operators are used in specific situations.<br />
Arithmetic<br />
Operators<br />
Use the arithmetic operators in assignment statements to perform<br />
arithmetic on numbers. The arithmetic operators do not function inside<br />
strings or conditions.<br />
+ addition add two numbers together<br />
- subtraction subtract one number from another<br />
* multiplication multiply two numbers<br />
/ division divide one number by another<br />
String Operators<br />
+ concatenation join two strings (not inside double quotation<br />
marks)<br />
. concatenation denote the end of a variable name inside double<br />
quotes<br />
Conditional<br />
Operators<br />
To control execution of a statement or a set of statements based on the<br />
value of a variable, use an IF statement <strong>with</strong> a condition.<br />
Numbers and strings<br />
= equality numbers or strings are equal<br />
inequality numbers or strings are not equal<br />
Numbers<br />
> greater than<br />
< less than<br />
>= greater than or equal to<br />
C–22 Script Language<br />
Examples<br />
_s = ”string”<br />
IF _s = ”string”<br />
IF _s = ”string ”<br />
IF _s = ”STRING”<br />
IF _s INCL ”ring”<br />
IF _s NOTINCL ”cow”<br />
_var1 = 10<br />
_var2 = 5 + 5<br />
IF _var2 = _var1<br />
IF _var2 var1<br />
IF _var1 > 0<br />
IF _var2 < 4<br />
IF _var1 >= 10<br />
IF _var1 statement).<br />
\> L-number Assign the result of a command to a variable<br />
(=> statement).<br />
# answer count Retrieve the number of answers from an<br />
L-number variable.
Script Language C–23<br />
Other Script<br />
Examples<br />
Use these scripts as models for scripts that meet your needs. To see other<br />
scripts, look in the Scripts and PSSfiles folders in your <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
installation.<br />
Registry Number<br />
Script Example<br />
Recall the script shown at the beginning of this appendix:<br />
\* Display CAS RNs in the Registry file on <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
=> FILE REGISTRY<br />
=> DIS 50-00-0<br />
=> DIS 7777-77-7<br />
=> LOG Y<br />
It does its job but is not very flexible. For example, what if you have long<br />
list of CAS Registry numbers instead of just a few? Use the OPEN, READ,<br />
IF, and CLOSE statements to process a file of Registry Numbers.<br />
\* <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> script to read list of RNs from a file<br />
\* and display information for each Registry Number.<br />
\* Open the data file for reading. There is one RN on<br />
\* each line.<br />
OPEN /R<br />
=> file registry<br />
\* Process all the RNs in the file<br />
@readloop<br />
\* Read an RN from the data file.<br />
READ _rn<br />
\* If an RN was read, send a DISPLAY command to <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
IF (_$filerror = 0)<br />
BEGIN<br />
\* Display the requested substance<br />
=> dis _rn<br />
GOTO @readloop<br />
END<br />
\* Close the input file<br />
CLOSE<br />
=><br />
EXIT
C–24 Script Language<br />
Author Search<br />
Script Example<br />
ECHO ””<br />
ECHO ”This is a script for running author searches.”<br />
ECHO ”Press [Esc] at any time if you would like to\<br />
stop.”<br />
ECHO ””<br />
ECHO ”In the pop-up box, enter the last or family\<br />
name of the author:”<br />
GET _lastname<br />
ECHO ”In the pop-up box, enter first or given name\<br />
or initial:”<br />
GET _firstname<br />
\* Use the <strong>STN</strong> expand command to provide choices of<br />
\* names.<br />
=><br />
=> expand _lastname _firstname/au<br />
ECHO ”Enter the e-numbers to search, e.g., e3-e5 or\<br />
e3,e7) or end”<br />
GET _enums<br />
IF (_enums = ”end”)<br />
BEGIN<br />
ECHO ”Ending author search at your request.”<br />
=><br />
EXIT<br />
END<br />
=><br />
=> search _enums \> _results<br />
\* If the search yielded zero answers, there is<br />
\* nothing to display. Inform the user and exit.<br />
IF (#_results = 0)<br />
BEGIN<br />
ECHO ”There are no answers for your query.”<br />
=><br />
EXIT<br />
END
Script Language C–25<br />
\* The search found hits, so ask how many should be<br />
\* displayed.<br />
ECHO ”How many answers would you like to display?<br />
(e.g., \#_results or 0):”<br />
GET _display<br />
IF (_display > 0)<br />
BEGIN<br />
ECHO ”Please provide a transcript name to use to\<br />
save your answers.”<br />
CAPTURE ON <br />
\* Don’t try to display more answers than are<br />
\* available.<br />
IF (_display > #_results) THEN _display =<br />
#_results<br />
=><br />
=> dis 1-_display bib<br />
CAPTURE OFF <br />
END<br />
ECHO ”Your author search is now complete.”<br />
=><br />
EXIT
C–26 Script Language<br />
Helpful Hints<br />
As you begin writing scripts, you may want to keep the following hints in<br />
mind.<br />
• Check Command File checks your script for some errors.<br />
Getting an error-free script from the command file checker does<br />
not guarantee that the script will do what it was intended to do. A<br />
clean bill of health from the command file checker also does not<br />
guarantee there are no errors in the script because some errors<br />
cannot be found until the script is run.<br />
• You may create a script in any word processor or text editor that<br />
allows you to save a file as plain text.<br />
• Add comments to a script by placing a \* anywhere on the line.<br />
To display a comment on the screen, use the ECHO statement.<br />
• Comments help make your script more readable or<br />
understandable to others.<br />
• The keywords in the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! script<br />
language are not case sensitive. However, upper and lower<br />
case do matter in strings, and spaces count, too. For example,<br />
“Yes” is different from “yes”, and “<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>” is different<br />
from “<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>”.<br />
• Use a standard spacing and indentation scheme to make your<br />
scripts more readable.<br />
• Enclose strings in the SEND, WAIT, FOR, and ECHO statements<br />
in double quotes.<br />
• Use the Escape or Clear key to stop a script from processing<br />
• Place a \ at the end of a line to continue a statement or string on<br />
the next line<br />
• All <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong> scripts must be in either the <strong>User</strong><br />
Scripts folder or the Predefined Scripts folder. When looking<br />
for a script to execute, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! first checks<br />
the <strong>User</strong> Scripts folder, then the Predefined Scripts folder.<br />
• Εnter only the unique portion of the prompt when using the<br />
WAIT FOR statement.<br />
• Use the SEND, WAIT FOR, and TRYAGAIN statements together<br />
because TRYAGAIN will resend the last item that was sent using<br />
a SEND statement. Many times, TRYAGAIN is an optional part<br />
of the statement trio because you would not want to resend<br />
some items, e.g., login ID or password.
Script Language C–27<br />
Logon Scripts<br />
There are two separate steps to logging on to an online host:<br />
1. connecting to the host through a telecommunications network<br />
2. logging on to the host<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> includes support for several telecommunications networks<br />
and online hosts. Before you take the time to write your own connection or<br />
logon script, find out whether <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> already provides the scripts<br />
you need. Also, you may find it easier to use the Watchme feature than to<br />
write your own logon script. Refer to Chapter 3, Logon Setup for <strong>STN</strong>, for<br />
details about Watchme.<br />
Predefined Setup<br />
Variables<br />
If you intend to write your own scripts that connect through a network or<br />
log on to an online host, be sure you understand the details of a logon<br />
setup. Many of the values defined in a logon setup are available to <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! scripts as variables. Below is a list of these<br />
variables, organized by the area <strong>with</strong>in Setup that sets the value.<br />
Setup Definition Dialog Box<br />
• Host Information area<br />
_$logid –Value of Login ID (for host)<br />
_$password – Value of Password for host<br />
_$service – Value of Host Name; set to “<strong>STN</strong>” for all <strong>STN</strong> hosts<br />
_$stncenter – Name of <strong>STN</strong> Node (Columbus, Karlsruhe, or<br />
Tokyo)<br />
• Path Information area<br />
_$connvia – Value of Connect via<br />
• Logon Method<br />
_$network – Value selected from network list<br />
• Network Logon area<br />
_$nua – Value of NUA (Network <strong>User</strong> Address)<br />
_$nui – Value of NUI (Network <strong>User</strong> Identifier)<br />
_$nup – Value of NUP (Network <strong>User</strong> Password)<br />
• Communication Settings area<br />
_$baud – Value of Speed<br />
_$dialtype – Value of Dial<br />
_$phoneno – Value of Primary Phone #<br />
_$phoneno2 – Value of Secondary Phone #<br />
• Host Settings tab<br />
_$qservname – Value of Choice of service (Questel)<br />
_$graphics – Value of Graphics (<strong>STN</strong>)<br />
_$stnport – Value of <strong>STN</strong> Port (<strong>STN</strong>)<br />
_$modinit – Value of Modem Configuration - Initialization String
C–28 Script Language<br />
Advanced Dialog Box<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
−<br />
_$gwcomm1 through _$gwcomm5 – Value of Execute at<br />
command prompt fields one through five<br />
_$gwloginp – Value of Prompt Character strings - Login<br />
_$gwcommp – Value of Prompt Character strings - Command<br />
_$gwpassp – Value of Prompt Character strings - Password<br />
_$gwid – Value of Gateway Login ID<br />
_$gwpw – Value of Gateway Password
Appendix<br />
D<br />
Questel<br />
Features<br />
on <strong>STN</strong><br />
Questel<br />
The following features are available while accessing Questel on <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!.<br />
Questel D–1<br />
• Offline Structure Building - build a structure query offline to<br />
search Questel’s Generic DARC system. Use the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
<strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! structure drawing tools and palettes described in<br />
Chapter 6, Structure Queries, to build your structure.<br />
• Autologon - create a logon setup to automatically log on to<br />
Questel<br />
• Upload Structure Query - upload structures drawn on <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! to search files on Questel’s Generic<br />
DARC system<br />
• Capture Online Displays - capture text and graphics results from<br />
an online session to a transcript. You may browse, print, edit, or<br />
export your transcript.<br />
Structure<br />
Query<br />
Building<br />
Select Prepare Structure Query from the Query menu or click the<br />
Prepare Query button if it is located on your Structure Drawing Toolbar.<br />
A new Untitled “Standard” structure drawing window is displayed.<br />
Select New/Questel from the File menu or click the button representing a<br />
new Questel structure query if it is located on your toolbar. See Chapter<br />
6, Structure Queries, for details about adding buttons to the Structure<br />
Drawing Toolbar.<br />
Draw your Questel structure query using the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
Structure Drawing menus, tools, and palettes. Refer to Chapter 6,<br />
Structure Queries, for details.<br />
Converting<br />
Existing <strong>STN</strong><br />
Structures<br />
to Questel<br />
Structures<br />
Select Open from the File menu to display the Open Query dialog box.<br />
Select a query to open by highlighting its name in the scrollable File Name<br />
list. The structure is previewed to the right of this list.<br />
Then click the radio button next to Questel. The structure is converted to a<br />
Questel structure format in the preview box.
D–2 Questel<br />
Click OK. The structure is placed in an Untitled Questel structure drawing<br />
window. The original structure query is not changed.<br />
Because structure drawing features may differ for Questel, it is<br />
recommended that you check the structure attributes by selecting Query<br />
Verification from the QueryDef menu. This should be done before you<br />
save and upload the query.<br />
For example, during conversion from <strong>STN</strong> to Questel, ring isolation<br />
settings are ignored, bond settings are reinterpreted using the Questel<br />
bond algorithm, and other attributes are ignored. Differences also occur<br />
in the shortcuts and variables available on Questel. Unrecognized nodes<br />
are converted to A (Any Atom) settings.<br />
Query Verification<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! verifies structure building according to an<br />
algorithm that corresponds to Questel’s use of aromatic, tautomeric, and<br />
exact settings. For example, bonds in even-numbered cyclic pathways<br />
<strong>with</strong> alternating single and double bonds are set as aromatic bonds.<br />
Bonds in tautomeric structures are marked as tautomeric.
Questel D–3<br />
Free Sites<br />
Free sites are used to specify the degree of substitution allowed at a<br />
specified position.<br />
To insert a free site, select one or more nodes using the Selection tool.<br />
Then select Free Sites from the QueryDef menu. The Free Sites dialog<br />
box is displayed. Click the number of free sites for the nodes you<br />
selected from the scrollable list. Then click OK.<br />
The number you selected represents the maximum number of attachments<br />
at that node. Because free sites are a maximum, the retrieval includes all<br />
lower degrees of substitution as well.<br />
☞ Bond types are not considered, e.g., an atom attached by a double<br />
bond is considered a single attachment.<br />
If no free sites are specified, the system completes the normal valency of<br />
the atoms <strong>with</strong> hydrogens when executing the search.<br />
Autologon<br />
For information on creating an automatic logon to Questel, refer to<br />
Chapter 5, Using non-<strong>STN</strong> Hosts and Appendix C, Script Language.<br />
As <strong>with</strong> <strong>STN</strong>, storing your logon ID and password are optional. If you do<br />
not enter them in your setup, you are prompted for them at logon. To<br />
logon to Generic DARC, set the “choice of service” in the Host Settings<br />
tab of your Setup to G.<br />
Always set the Host Name in your setup to Questel.<br />
After logging on to Generic DARC, you can run the Command file<br />
“qst_op.sc” to set the language and the terminal type. The terminal type is<br />
set to S for <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! support.
D–4 Questel<br />
Uploading<br />
Structure Queries<br />
Select Exit Structure Drawing from the File menu to search a structure<br />
query on Questel’s Generic DARC system. You are prompted to save and<br />
name your structure query.<br />
Click the Logon menu from the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Main Menu bar or click the<br />
Logon button if it is located on the Main Menu Toolbar. Choose to logon<br />
to your Questel setup. The Capture Session dialog box is displayed.<br />
If you are prompted to enter a transcript name to save your online<br />
session, i.e., text and graphics, type a name in the File Name text box and<br />
click Open.<br />
After you connect to Questel, select Upload Structure Query from the<br />
Query menu. Select a structure query to upload and click Open.<br />
Switching<br />
from Generic<br />
DARC to<br />
Questel<br />
You may switch from Generic DARC to the Questel system while online by<br />
using the BI option. If you experience problems, log off and then log back<br />
on to Questel.
Appendix<br />
E<br />
MDL Molfile<br />
Conversion Assumptions<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> fi MDL Molfile<br />
exact<br />
exact/normalized<br />
normalized<br />
unspecified<br />
ring/chain<br />
chain<br />
ring<br />
manually set<br />
set by <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
stereo<br />
G-groups<br />
shortcuts<br />
ring, ring/chain, chain<br />
variables<br />
X<br />
M,Q<br />
Id<br />
all others<br />
Nodes Nodes<br />
Attributes<br />
Reaction centers<br />
CC<br />
PC<br />
XC<br />
NC<br />
NON<br />
reactant, reactant/reagent, reagent<br />
product<br />
delocalized charge, match level, element count,<br />
variable points of attachment, stereo centers and bonds, and generic<br />
definitions<br />
connectivity<br />
ring bond counts of 2, 3, or 4<br />
all other ring counts<br />
all other Non-H connections<br />
repeating units<br />
single node<br />
all others<br />
Bonds<br />
exact<br />
any<br />
any<br />
any<br />
ring/chain<br />
chain<br />
ring<br />
ring/chain<br />
single<br />
lists or R-groups<br />
superatoms<br />
ignored<br />
halogen list<br />
Q<br />
*<br />
A<br />
make/break<br />
change<br />
center<br />
not center<br />
none<br />
reactant<br />
product<br />
ignored<br />
translated<br />
ignored<br />
translated to substitution<br />
counts<br />
translated<br />
ignored<br />
H count H ct. (>4 fi ‡4)<br />
isotope, valency and charge<br />
translated<br />
ring isolation assigns ring bond count of *
E–2 MDL Molfile Conversion Assumptions<br />
MDL Molfile fi <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
MDL Molfile fi <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
Bonds<br />
single<br />
single exact<br />
double<br />
double exact<br />
aromatic<br />
single normalized<br />
S/D<br />
unspecified<br />
S/aromatic<br />
single exact/normalized<br />
D/aromatic<br />
double<br />
exact/normalized<br />
any<br />
unspecified<br />
ring<br />
ring<br />
ring/chain<br />
ring/chain<br />
chain<br />
chain<br />
stereo double<br />
double exact<br />
stereo single<br />
single exact<br />
reaction centers<br />
center<br />
make/break<br />
change<br />
make & change<br />
not center<br />
none<br />
XC<br />
CC<br />
PC<br />
CC<br />
NC<br />
NON<br />
Atoms Atoms<br />
list<br />
G-group<br />
R-group<br />
G-group<br />
* Id<br />
any unrecognized symbol<br />
A<br />
Attributes Attributes<br />
charge, valence, and isotope<br />
translated<br />
substitution count<br />
ring/chain connectivity<br />
ring bond count<br />
ring connectivity<br />
all bonds in a ring system are *<br />
repeating groups<br />
stereochemistry, unsaturated atom, exact change, and no implicit<br />
hydrogens<br />
ring isolated<br />
translated<br />
ignored
Appendix<br />
Connecting to a Host<br />
Through a Gateway<br />
Connecting to a Host F–1<br />
FOverview<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> can connect to <strong>STN</strong> or another host directly over the<br />
Internet using the telnet protocol. Depending on your organization’s<br />
network or security requirements, there may be a telnet gateway, a<br />
firewall, or a proxy server (all referred to as a gateway) between your PC<br />
and the host computer. <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> can connect through most gateways.<br />
If you can telnet to the host, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> will be able to connect to it.<br />
To connect through a telnet gateway, you must know the details of the<br />
gateway’s prompts and interaction. For example, if the gateway prompts<br />
for a loginid, you must know the characters in that prompt. You must also<br />
know the gateway command for completing the connection to the host.<br />
Because a gateway is specific to your organization, you may wish to<br />
consult your network administrator or computer support group about<br />
connecting to and logging on to your gateway.<br />
Example<br />
Suppose you want to connect to <strong>STN</strong> Columbus and have a telnet<br />
gateway that requires that you log into it and then type the destination host<br />
name or IP address. After you connect to the gateway, a transcript of the<br />
steps required to navigate through the gateway might look like the<br />
following. The gateway’s messages, which are not of interest to <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong>, are shown in a normal font, the gateway’s prompts are shown in<br />
a bold font, and the information you type is shown in italics. (For<br />
security, the password is not shown.)<br />
Welcome to HQ telnet gateway.<br />
<strong>User</strong>: asmith<br />
Password:<br />
<strong>User</strong> asmith OK<br />
Ready> stnc.cas.org<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> can automatically navigate through the gateway if it is aware<br />
of the gateway’s login prompt (<strong>User</strong>:), password prompt (Password:),<br />
and command prompt (Ready>). You may use the <strong>STN</strong> Setup Wizard to<br />
provide this information to <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>. If you want to connect to a host<br />
other than <strong>STN</strong>, or if you prefer not to use the Setup Wizard, create or<br />
modify your setup as described below.
F–2 Connecting to a Host<br />
Modifying<br />
Your Setup<br />
Follow these steps to modify your setup in order to connect to an online<br />
host through a telnet gateway:<br />
1. In the Setup Definition dialog box, type the name or address of the<br />
gateway in the Host Name or IP address box. This causes <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> to connect to the gateway instead of directly to <strong>STN</strong> or<br />
another host.<br />
2. In the Setup Definition dialog box, click the Advanced button to open<br />
the Advanced dialog box.<br />
Advanced<br />
Dialog Box<br />
Values<br />
Prompt Character<br />
Strings<br />
The values that you enter for Prompt Character strings define the<br />
prompts sent by the gateway. You may ignore other messages the<br />
gateway might display. Your gateway might issue all or only some of the<br />
three prompts that <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> supports. In general, leave the Prompt<br />
Character strings box empty if your gateway does not display a<br />
particular prompt.<br />
Login<br />
The login prompt specifies the way the gateway asks for your loginid or<br />
user name. For the example gateway, the prompt is <strong>User</strong>:.
Connecting to a Host F–3<br />
Password<br />
When a gateway asks for a password, it issues the password prompt.<br />
Password: is the example gateway’s password prompt.<br />
Command<br />
A gateway displays the command prompt when it is ready to accept the<br />
command that causes it to connect to the online host. In the example<br />
gateway, Ready> is the command prompt.<br />
Optional<br />
Type the responses to the loginid and password prompts Optional area. If<br />
you choose not to save your loginid or password, or both, in the logon<br />
setup, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> will ask for them when needed.<br />
Type your gateway loginid in the box. If you do not know your gateway<br />
loginid, contact your network administrator. In the example, the loginid is<br />
asmith.<br />
If you enter your gateway password, it is encrypted and saved <strong>with</strong> the<br />
logon setup in express.ini. The password is not visible when typed.<br />
If you save your password in the logon setup, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> asks you to<br />
retype the password after you click OK.<br />
Execute at<br />
Command Prompt<br />
After you have logged in to the gateway, the gateway may display a<br />
prompt that indicates it is ready to accept commands. Enter up to five<br />
gateway commands in the boxes. Typically only one command is needed,<br />
and this might be a telnet command, a connect command, or something<br />
similar. In the example, all that’s needed is the host name or IP address of<br />
the destination, stnc.cas.org.<br />
☞ You can find the names and addresses of the supported hosts in<br />
the Setup Definition dialog by selecting the online host in the<br />
Host Name list and looking at the Host Name or IP address<br />
box.<br />
Interaction<br />
<strong>with</strong> a<br />
Gateway<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> communicates <strong>with</strong> a gateway as follows:<br />
• After matching the Login prompt, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
sends the Gateway Login ID<br />
• After matching the Password prompt, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! sends the Password<br />
• Each time the Command prompt is matched, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! sends the value in the next Execute at command<br />
prompt field<br />
☞ Matching of control characters <strong>with</strong>in a prompt is not supported.
F–4 Connecting to a Host<br />
Custom<br />
Logon Setup<br />
for <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong><br />
Versions<br />
prior to 5.0<br />
Starting <strong>with</strong> <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> 5.0, a custom logon procedure is not required<br />
to make use of the Advanced Gateway options. The Gateway.sc script will<br />
automatically run if any of the Prompt Character strings boxes are not<br />
empty. Older, custom logon setups for gateways can be used in <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>6.0</strong>, and the following information has been retained as<br />
documentation for them.<br />
Connecting to a host system through a gateway using a Custom Logon<br />
method requires several steps. Each step typically requires that an <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! script be included <strong>with</strong>in the Custom Logon<br />
section. These steps include:<br />
1. Connecting to the gateway:<br />
• Identify a script to connect to the gateway. No script is needed for<br />
this step for a Winsock connection.<br />
• Add this script as the first script in the Custom Logon section.<br />
• Set the values of the Communication Settings section to allow<br />
connection to the gateway, not to the host system.<br />
2. Logging on to the gateway and issuing the command to connect to the<br />
host system:<br />
• Add Gateway.sc as the next (or first) script in the Custom Logon<br />
• Fill in values in the Gateway Configuration section in the<br />
Advanced dialog box to allow logging on to the gateway.<br />
• Enter the command used to connect from the gateway to the<br />
online host in the Execute at command prompt field, e.g., telnet<br />
stnc.cas.org.<br />
3. Logging on to the host system:<br />
• Add the script normally used to log on to the host system as the<br />
last script in the Custom Logon Script List. Always use<br />
<strong>STN</strong>LOGON to log on to <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
☞<br />
If you have difficulties using the Gateway.sc script to connect<br />
through a gateway, consider using the Watch Me function,<br />
described in Chapters 3 and 5, as an alternative.
Appendix<br />
G<br />
Overview<br />
Network Installation<br />
Network Installation G–1<br />
The Setup program for <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! offers special features<br />
for shared, network installations. In general, creating a network<br />
installation of <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> is a three-step process:<br />
1. Install <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> on the server.<br />
2. Share the server installation (make it visibile on the network).<br />
3. Install <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> on one or more client PCs.<br />
The result is a shared network folder that contains the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
programs and one or more client installations that refer to the shared<br />
folder.<br />
Features and<br />
limitations<br />
· <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! and its setup program support the<br />
Universal Naming Convention (UNC) standard, e.g.,<br />
\\APPSRV\<strong>STN</strong>EXP and mapped network drive letters.<br />
· If you use mapped drive letters, be aware that the EXPRESS.INI file,<br />
stored on the client PC, contains paths to the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> installation<br />
on the server. Therefore, the network share that contains the <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! applications must always be mapped to the<br />
same client drive letter (the drive letter may be different on each<br />
client).<br />
· The server installation may be performed at the server or across the<br />
network.<br />
+ Review the ReadMe file on the CD-ROM disc for details pertaining to<br />
network installations before proceeding. Any last minute changes are<br />
documented there.
G–2 Network Installation<br />
Installing <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> on a<br />
Server<br />
To install or upgrade the software on your server, run SETUP.EXE and<br />
choose the Network Server option from the Setup Type section of the<br />
Install <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! window. One Setup Option is<br />
available for Network Server installs:<br />
· Softcopy documentation – copy the PDF <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> to the<br />
server.<br />
Type the path to the server installation folder, or click the > button to<br />
browse.<br />
Click Install <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! to continue.<br />
The Setup program will then build the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! folder.<br />
It will not create a Windows Start Menu item, nor will it create the<br />
EXPRESS.INI control file. These will be created during the Network Client<br />
setup (see below).<br />
The Setup program creates a special version of itself and stores it in the<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> root folder (typically <strong>STN</strong>EXP) on the server. This program,<br />
SETUP.EXE, can be run by users to install <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
on their local machines. It will build the local <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> folder structure<br />
and create a Windows Start Menu item for <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>. It also builds the<br />
EXPRESS.INI control file and stores it in the local Windows folder.<br />
See the Changing SETUP.INF section below for important information<br />
about the network patch to the server isntallation.<br />
Sharing<br />
the server<br />
installation<br />
on the<br />
network<br />
Share the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> installation on the network. Client may refer to the<br />
network share by its UNC name or by mapping a drive letter to it.<br />
It is recommended that all files residing on the server be write protected<br />
from the network.
Network Installation G–3<br />
Changing<br />
SETUP.INF<br />
After the Network Server installation is complete, you may need to modify<br />
the contents of the setup control file for user installations. To do this, edit<br />
the file SETUP.INF located in the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> folder on the server. The<br />
following section should be verified.<br />
· [server] - verify that this section contains the proper network path<br />
to the server installation. This value is used as the default path for<br />
the Network <strong>User</strong> setup. If this value will not be consistent across<br />
all network user machines, e.g., on one client PC it is N:\<strong>STN</strong>EXP<br />
and another it is I:\<strong>STN</strong>EXP, leave this field blank (“<strong>Express</strong>=”).<br />
Installing <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> on a<br />
client PC<br />
Each user of <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! should run SETUP.EXE from<br />
the server drive. Simply select the Network <strong>User</strong> option from the Setup<br />
Type section of the opening dialog box.<br />
The “Path to Network <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>” is activated. Verify that it contains the<br />
appropriate path specification to the network folder for <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>.<br />
Contact your network administrator if it does not specify the network folder<br />
for <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>.<br />
Enter the appropriate storage location on the local PC in the following<br />
dialog box. The Setup program will then build the local <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>! environment.<br />
The Setup program located on the CD may also be used; however, it<br />
contains a generic specification for network installations and further<br />
changes may be needed after it is complete.<br />
Upgrading to <strong>6.0</strong><br />
from a Network<br />
Server<br />
If you are currently running <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> 5.0 from a network server on<br />
your client PC, first make sure the server installation has been updated to<br />
<strong>6.0</strong>. Then run setup.exe from the server. This gives you everything needed<br />
to use the new features.
G–4 Network Installation<br />
Information<br />
for Network<br />
Administrators<br />
If you wish to set up a standard set of logon procedures and preferences<br />
for all of your users, follow the steps below:<br />
1. Install <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! on the server as described<br />
above. Then perform a Network Client install on one user’s PC.<br />
2. Start <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! on the user’s PC and define<br />
options that you want all users to have, i.e., logon procedures and<br />
user preferences.<br />
3. Exit <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! and save changes when<br />
prompted.<br />
4. Copy the EXPRESS.INI file and any additional .INI files<br />
beginning <strong>with</strong> the letters “<strong>STN</strong>” from this PC’s WINDOWS folder<br />
to the server. Also, any files that are created in the USCRIPTS<br />
folder (as the result of Custom Logon or Logoff scripts) should<br />
also be copied to all client machines. They can then be copied to<br />
any user’s PC after a Network <strong>User</strong> setup has been done.<br />
Please note the following limitations:<br />
· Store any .INI files on the server, using a different name, e.g.,<br />
name.NET. This will prevent any confusion when running the<br />
program. <strong>User</strong>s must copy these files to their WINDOWS folder<br />
and rename them to the original name. This is a requirement!<br />
· All users of <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> must have <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!<br />
loaded in the same path on their local machines. For example, all<br />
users must have c:\stnexp as the root folder for <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong><br />
<strong>Discover</strong>!. The reason for this is that the EXPRESS.INI<br />
file contains path names for storing and accessing files. If this is<br />
not done, path specifications will be incorrect and <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
<strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! will not work properly.<br />
If you have any questions or problems, please contact your Help Desk.
Network Installation G–5<br />
Converting<br />
a Single-<strong>User</strong><br />
Installation to<br />
a Network<br />
Share<br />
· Follow the steps in the Installing <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> on a Server<br />
section of this Appendix to install the Network Server copy.<br />
· Follow the steps in the Installing <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> on a Client PC<br />
section of this Appendix to convert each copy of <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
<strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! to a Network <strong>User</strong> copy.<br />
· Select the location where <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> currently resides. The<br />
installation program upgrades the files and the program group to<br />
access <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! on the server.<br />
+ Only files provided by your previous <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> installation<br />
programs are overwritten. Any structures, scripts, guided search<br />
strategies, or transcripts that you have created are unaffected by this<br />
installation. However, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> scripts that you have modified<br />
should be moved out of the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> directory. Changes to those<br />
files should be added to the new versions supplied <strong>with</strong> version <strong>6.0</strong>.
Appendix<br />
H<br />
Overview<br />
Removing <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> and Its Applications H–1<br />
Removing <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> and<br />
Its Applications<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>6.0</strong> includes an uninstaller program. See the ReadMe.txt file<br />
for details. If the uninstaller program is not available, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> may be<br />
removed manually.<br />
Removing<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
From Your<br />
Hard Disk<br />
To remove <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> from your hard disk, follow these steps:<br />
1. Copy or move all queries and transcripts that you want to keep to<br />
a safe location.<br />
2. Remove the <strong>STN</strong>EXP folder and all folders contained <strong>with</strong>in.<br />
Consult the file Desetup.inf for a list of files installed by <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!.<br />
3. Remove <strong>Express</strong>.ini and all other Stnxxxxx.ini files from the<br />
WINDOWS folder.<br />
To remove the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Start menu item:<br />
1. Right click on the Windows Task Bar.<br />
2. Click Properties.<br />
3. Select the Start Menu Programs tab.<br />
4. Click the Remove button.<br />
5. Scroll down the list to find the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Group. Select this<br />
group.<br />
6. Click the Remove button.
H–2 Removing <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> and Its Applications<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
Applications<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! consists of the following distinct programs:<br />
Program icon Program name Function<br />
<strong>Express</strong>.exe<br />
Stnpsi.exe<br />
Stnsetup.exe<br />
Stnterm.exe<br />
Stnacct.exe<br />
Stnedit.exe<br />
Stnwpi.exe<br />
Stnocc.exe<br />
The main program and toolbar<br />
provide access to <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong> programs. Logon<br />
setups and General<br />
Preferences are stored in the<br />
file: express.ini.<br />
Structure Drawing.<br />
Preferences are stored in<br />
stnpsi.ini.<br />
Logon setup program. Use it<br />
to create and change logon<br />
setups. Its configuration file is<br />
stnsetup.ini, but the logon<br />
setups themselves are stored<br />
in express.ini.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Online and Results.<br />
Preferences are stored in<br />
stnterm.ini.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Accounting.<br />
Preferences are stored in<br />
stnacct.ini.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> Edit (text editor). Its<br />
configuration file is stnedit.ini.<br />
Fragmentation Code<br />
Generator for Derwent WPI<br />
queries.<br />
Other Code Concepts<br />
program for Derwent WPI<br />
queries.<br />
Applications may be removed from the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> directory if you do<br />
not intend to use them.
Removing <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> and Its Applications H–3<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
Folders and<br />
Files<br />
Additional folders and files that are added to your hard disk include:<br />
Folder or File<br />
Content<br />
.dll files<br />
.dta files<br />
.hlp files<br />
Networks file<br />
Pssfiles<br />
Queries<br />
Scripts<br />
Template<br />
Trnscript<br />
Umanual<br />
Uscripts<br />
Library files essential to the function of the<br />
applications<br />
Data files used in Derwent WPI Fragmentation<br />
Code Strategy generation<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Help files for the Windows help<br />
system.<br />
Data file for supported communication networks<br />
Scripts that implement specific (Predefined<br />
Search Strategies)<br />
Default location for storing your structure<br />
queries<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> scripts for connecting through<br />
supported networks and logging on to<br />
supported online hosts<br />
Pre-drawn chemical structure templates used<br />
for building structure queries. Standard (.std),<br />
stereo (.str), and SpecInfo (.spe) templates are<br />
included.<br />
Default location for storing your <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
session transcripts, reports, and tables<br />
Electronic <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> in PDF format<br />
Scripts and command files written by you; the<br />
<strong>STN</strong> accounting file; and other user-specific<br />
files
Appendix<br />
I<br />
Overview<br />
Troubleshooting<br />
Troubleshooting I–1<br />
This section provides answers to common problems that you may<br />
encounter while using <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>!. You may also visit<br />
CAS Software Support on the Web at http://www.cas.org/Support/<br />
software.html.<br />
Problems<br />
<strong>with</strong><br />
Transcripts<br />
This information pertains to traditional, .trn transcripts, not to transcripts that<br />
are captured as RTF.<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> transcripts that contain structure diagrams are stored in two<br />
main files. You provide the name for the files when the transcript is created.<br />
One file, <strong>with</strong> a .trn extension, contains the text of the transcript. The other<br />
file, <strong>with</strong> a .gra extension, contains the graphic (structure diagrams) part of<br />
the transcript. For example, if you name the transcript <strong>STN</strong> search.trn, then<br />
that file contains the text part of the transcript, and the file <strong>STN</strong> search.gra<br />
contains the structure diagrams for the transcript. If you downloaded<br />
images, there will be one .tif, .jpg, or gif file for each image.<br />
1. Graphics (structure diagrams and downloaded images) are missing<br />
from a transcript on your screen<br />
· <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Browse Transcript knows how to combine the<br />
text and graphics files into one display. If graphics are missing,<br />
check to see that both the .trn and .gra files exist and are<br />
stored in the same folder.<br />
· <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Edit Transcript reads only the text portion (.trn<br />
file) of a transcript and cannot display graphics.<br />
· If you open a transcript in Microsoft Word or another program,<br />
be sure to Export the transcript first. The export process<br />
combines the .trn, .gra, and .tif files into one RTF file.<br />
2. Graphics (structure diagrams and TIFF images) are missing from a<br />
printed transcript<br />
· If graphics are missing from a printed transcript, check for the<br />
existence of the files as noted above.<br />
· Print the transcript from Browse Transcript or from the main<br />
menu bar (Results -> Print Transcript).<br />
· Because <strong>STN</strong>Edit does not display graphics, it cannot print<br />
them.<br />
· Go to Terminal Emulation Preferences, the Online tab, and<br />
check the Print Chemical Structures box.
I–2 Troubleshooting<br />
3. Line wrap in printed transcripts<br />
If you see the ends of lines wrapping to the start of the next line,<br />
check the margins and font size. By default, <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> uses a 10<br />
pt. Courier New font and 0.75-inch left and right margins. To solve<br />
the line-wrap problem, switch to a smaller font or use smaller left and<br />
right margins. To change the font, select Preferences, then <strong>STN</strong><br />
Online and Results, and then the Colors/Fonts/Scaling tab. To<br />
change the margins while browsing a transcript, select Page Layout<br />
from the File menu.<br />
Downloaded<br />
Images<br />
TIFF, JPEG, and GIF images, such as patent drawings or complete page<br />
images, are available in several <strong>STN</strong> files. See the appropriate section in<br />
Chapter 4 for more information.<br />
1. Problems downloading images<br />
For faster TIFF, JPEG, and GIF image downloads in <strong>STN</strong> files such<br />
as CAOLD, DEMAS, and WPINDEX, use the default setting of<br />
Long Packets and a packet size of 4000 that is found on the<br />
Online tab of the <strong>STN</strong> Online and Results Preferences. If you<br />
see Kermit error messages, try reducing the packet size.<br />
A packet size of 4000 is not recommended for low-speed<br />
connections. Recommendations are:<br />
Connection<br />
Speed<br />
Packet<br />
Size<br />
Internet/Winsock 4000<br />
9600 and higher 4000<br />
2400 and up 1000<br />
1200 and up 500<br />
2. Locating downloaded images<br />
When you download images while you capture a transcript, the<br />
images are named the same as your transcript plus a three-digit<br />
number. The image files have appropriate extensions (.tif, .jpg, .gif)<br />
in their names.<br />
When you download images when no transcript is captured, the<br />
image files are named starting <strong>with</strong> Image001 and continuing <strong>with</strong><br />
Image002, etc. Appropriate extensions (.tif, .jpg, .gif) are used.
Troubleshooting I–3<br />
3. TIFF images print smaller than expected<br />
· When TIFF images are printed in the context of a transcript,<br />
they appear smaller than you might desire. Check the 1 TIFF<br />
Image/page box on the Page Layout dialog box that opens<br />
during the transcript printing process.<br />
· When TIFF images are printed from the TIFF image viewer,<br />
they are printed at a size that is proportional to the viewer’s<br />
“zoom factor”. For the largest possible printed image, zoom in<br />
(View -> Zoom In) as far as possible and then select File -><br />
Print.<br />
Modem<br />
Problems<br />
Communications problems include characters lost from answer displays,<br />
corrupt structure diagrams, and difficulty downloading images. These<br />
problems occur much more frequently under modem connections than<br />
<strong>with</strong> Internet/Winsock connections.<br />
Missing characters and corrupt structure diagrams:<br />
· For modem speeds of 4800 baud and higher, use hardware<br />
(RTS/CTS flow) control. For modem speeds under 4800 baud,<br />
use software (XON/XOFF) flow control. The flow control setting<br />
is found in your modem Control Panel or in your <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong><br />
logon setup.<br />
· For modem speeds of 9600 baud and higher, the correct<br />
communications parameters are data bits: 8; parity: none; stop<br />
bits: 1.<br />
· Make sure you have a current version of the driver for your<br />
modem brand and model.<br />
Not Able to<br />
Connect -<br />
General<br />
Script SYSCNCT - Unable to open command file pop-up message<br />
Terminal Emulation is not able to locate a script that is needed to log on to<br />
the host. The most likely cause is that the path to the Predefined Scripts<br />
folder is incorrect in General Preferences. To check the path, go to the<br />
main <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> menu bar, select Setup -> Preferences -> General.<br />
The Predefined Scripts box must contain the location of a folder that holds<br />
the scripts that are packaged <strong>with</strong> <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>. By default, the path is<br />
C:\Program Files\Stnexp\Scripts, but your installation location might be<br />
different. The paths in General Preferences can be rendered incorrect<br />
by moving the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> installation folder from one place to another.
I–4 Troubleshooting<br />
Not able to<br />
connect -<br />
modem<br />
In general, look for messages in the Terminal Emulation window that point<br />
to the problem. Check to see that the modem has power and is connected<br />
to the computer and a working telephone line.<br />
1. The modem is not responding to modem commands message<br />
· Check to make sure an external modem is turned on.<br />
· Check to make sure the modem is connected to a serial port on<br />
the computer.<br />
· Check that COM port setting in the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> logon setup is<br />
the one to which the modem is attached.<br />
2. The telephone line is not providing a tone for dialing message<br />
· Check that the modem is connected to a live, working phone<br />
line.<br />
· Check that the phone line is not being used by a telephone or<br />
another modem (is the line busy?).<br />
· If you selected a modem from the Connect via list in your logon<br />
setup, try selecting the modem’s COM port instead.<br />
Not able to<br />
connect –<br />
Internet<br />
In general, look for pop-up messages and messages in the Terminal<br />
Emulation window that point to the problem.<br />
1. Unable to Establish Connection pop-up message<br />
· Check the Host Name or IP address in the logon setup. Be<br />
sure there are no typing mistakes or leading or trailing spaces.<br />
If you’re not able to connect to the specified host name, try the<br />
equivalent IP address.<br />
· Try to connect to the Host Name or IP address using the<br />
Windows telnet.exe program. This tests the ability to connect<br />
<strong>with</strong>out <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>.<br />
· Your connection attempt might be hitting a firewall or gateway.<br />
Contact your network administrator for instructions on how to<br />
use telnet outside your organization’s network.<br />
2. Terminal Emulation hangs, or the connection times out<br />
· See #1 immediately above.<br />
3. Dial-Up Networking does not launch<br />
· The DUN connection might already be established.<br />
· Try establishing the dial-up connection first, outside of <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong>. If the connection cannot be made, the problem is<br />
probably in the DUN configuration or modem Control Panel.
Troubleshooting I–5<br />
Unexpected<br />
behavior after<br />
reconnecting<br />
Always begin and complete your <strong>STN</strong> session using the same<br />
telecommunications software. If you initially logged on through <strong>STN</strong><br />
<strong>Express</strong>, end your session through <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>. For example, if you<br />
initially connect to <strong>STN</strong> using Windows telnet, then disconnect, and then<br />
reconnect to the same session using <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>, you will observe<br />
abnormal behavior in <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>.<br />
Problems<br />
switching from<br />
Generic DARC<br />
to Questel<br />
If you have trouble switching from the Generic DARC system to Questel<br />
using the BI command, log off from Generic DARC and then connect to<br />
Questel directly and log on.<br />
Creating a<br />
Setup<br />
1. Error opening Network Control file pop-up message after clicking<br />
New or Modify<br />
The file <strong>Express</strong>.ini is stored in the Windows (Windows 95/98/Me)<br />
folder or the WinNT folder (Windows NT 4.0/2000). In <strong>Express</strong>.ini,<br />
in the [Paths] section, the value of the express= parameter must be<br />
the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> installation folder. By default this folder is<br />
C:\Program Files\Stnexp. The parameter can be incorrect if the<br />
<strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> installation folder is moved from one place to another.<br />
To correct the problem, edit <strong>Express</strong>.ini and change the value of the<br />
express= line to the location of your <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> installation.<br />
2. The OK button is grey<br />
Some piece of required information is missing. A Setup Name is<br />
required for every logon setup. A Logon Method other than None<br />
and a Primary Phone # are required for each setup that uses a<br />
modem.
I–6 Troubleshooting<br />
Structure<br />
Upload<br />
1. General problems<br />
· Try uploading the structure again. Line noise or a poor<br />
connection can cause the upload to fail.<br />
· Communications settings might be incorrect. If you are<br />
experiencing data loss in general, see the Communications<br />
problems - modem section above.<br />
· Be sure that <strong>STN</strong> recognizes your terminal as <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>.<br />
Always use the <strong>STN</strong>LOGON script to complete your log on to<br />
<strong>STN</strong>.<br />
· The problem could be due to the particular structure. If you can<br />
successfully upload other structure queries, report the problem<br />
structure to the Help Desk.<br />
2. Fatal Kermit Error pop-up message<br />
· See the information in #1 immediately above.<br />
· The maximum size of a structure query for uploading might have<br />
been exceeded. Modify your query to make it smaller, or use the<br />
STRUCTURE command on <strong>STN</strong>.<br />
Additional<br />
Help<br />
If you need further assistance, contact the Help Desk for your <strong>STN</strong><br />
Service Center:<br />
· Go to the <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> Help menu, select Request Help, and<br />
then select your <strong>STN</strong> Service Center to send email.<br />
· Telephone your Help Desk as listed in Chapter 1, Introduction.<br />
Please have the following information available when you call or write.<br />
· <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong> <strong>with</strong> <strong>Discover</strong>! version number, e.g., <strong>6.0</strong>a. To find<br />
the exact version, go to the Help menu on the main menu bar and<br />
select About <strong>STN</strong> <strong>Express</strong>.<br />
· Operating System, e.g., Windows NT 4.0<br />
· System information, including amount of memory (RAM)<br />
· Specific information about your problem.